Saab Automobile Saab 9 3 M2006 User Guide

Owner’s Manual

Saab 9-3 M2006

Safety 11

Security 49

9-3 Convertible 63

Instruments and controls 83

Interior equipment 127

Starting and driving 159

Car care 213

Customer Assistance and Information 287

Technical data 293

Index 283

Service Readiness, Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden

Printed in Sweden

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instrument panel

Fuel gauge __________________

Odometer and trip meter________

Speedometer ________________

Tachometer__________________

Temperature gauge____________

Turbo gauge _________________

Warning and indicator lights _____

Clock _______________________

Profiler ______________________

Saab Information Display (SID) ___

Cruise Control___________ 179

Direction indicators _______ 104

High/low beam control stalk 103

Replacing wiper blades ___ 230

Washers and wipers______ 106

Washer fluid ____________ 231

Changing bulbs__________ 232

Front fog lights___________ 104

Headlight levelling________ 102

High/low beam __________ 103

Parking lights____________ 102

Rear fog light____________ 104

Automatic climate control __ 115

Car care and maintenance_ 282

Hazard warning lights_____ 105

Manual climate control ____ 110

Seat heating____________ 114

Seat heating, ACC _______ 123

Ashtray _____________________ 144

Cigarette lighter _______________ 144

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Exterior

Maximum loads _______________ 294

Mounting holes for roof carriers ___ 202

Roof load ____________________ 202

Hood _______________________ 214

Washing the engine bay_________ 277

Anti-corrosion treatment ___ 280

Body __________________ 279

Service program _________ 288

Sunroof ________________ 138

Touching up paintwork ____ 279

Washing _______________ 277

Waxing and polishing _____ 279

Changing bulbs _________ 232

Dipswitch ______________ 102

Direction indicators_______ 104

Front lights _____________ 234

Headlight levelling (xenon) _ 102

Headlight switches _______ 102

Headlight washers _______ 231

Brake lights _____________ 240

Changing bulbs__________ 232

Light switches ___________ 102

Taillights _______________ 240

Central locking __________

Child safety locks ________

Lock buttons____________

Trunk lock______________

Folding down the rear seat _ 146

Lighting ________________ 240

Load-through hatch_______ 148

Spare wheel ____________ 150

Tools __________________ 150

Trunk__________________ 146

Braking _____________________ 180

Changing wheels______________ 273

Spare wheel _________________ 270

Tire pressure ________________ 306

Tires _______________________ 256

Wheels _____________________ 304

Winter driving ________________ 195

Economical motoring _____ 193

Fuel filler door __________ 167

Fuel gauge _____________

Fuel grade _____________ 299

Refueling ______________ 167

Towing_________________ 205

Towing hook eyes ________ 205

Towing a trailer __________ 198

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interior

Interior rearview mirror _________ 133

Vanity mirror _________________ 142

Door mirrors__________________ 132

Interior lighting: changing bulbs ___ 245

Interior light switches ___________ 141

Sunroof _____________________ 138

Airbag _________________ 32

Steering wheel adjustment _ 128

Steering _______________ 302

Airbag_________________

Child safety locks ________

Child seats _____________

Safety belt care _________ 276

Safety belts ____________ 12

Fuses _________________ 247

Electric windows _________ 129

Glove box ______________ 144

Storage compartments____ 144

Automatic transmission ___ 173

Changing gears _________ 172

Manual transmission _____ 172

Child seats ________________

Folding down the rear seat ____

Rear seat__________________

Safety belts ________________

Seat adjustment ____________

Seat heating _______________

146

Ashtray and cigarette lighter _____ 144

Break-In Period _______________ 171

Driving in hot/cold climates ______ 195

Ignition switch ________________ 160

Parking brake_________________ 187

Parking _____________________ 187

Starting the engine ____________ 162

114,

123

276

Upholstery care_____________

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Engine bay, 4-cyl

Changing engine oil____________ 220

Engine: description ____________ 215

Engine: technical data __________ 297

Important considerations for driving 164

Oil grade and viscosity__________ 298

Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 222

Driving in hot climates __________ 197

Radiator_____________________ 297

Temperature gauge ____________

Color code______________ 307

Engine number __________ 307

Gearbox number _________ 307

ABS brakes_____________ 180

Brake pads _____________ 224

Brake system ___________ 303

Brake fluid______________ 224

Warning labels __________

Vehicle identification number 307

Alternator ______________ 229

Drive belt_______________ 229

Exhaust emission control __ 165

Ignition system __________ 300

Simple troubleshooting

(A/C, ACC)_____________ 282

Changing a fuse_________ 247

Fuse table _____________ 252

Fuses _________________ 247

Relays ________________ 252

Spark plugs_____________ 300

Turbo gauge ____________ 90

Topping-up fluid _________ 231

Wash/wipe stalk switch____ 106

Washer fluid ____________ 231

Washer jets ____________ 231

Engine oil: checking level __ 219

Automatic transmission _________ 173

Transmission: technical data _____ 301

Manual transmission ___________ 172

Power steering________________ 225

Fluid: checking/topping up_______ 225

Battery ______________________ 226

Battery charge ________________ 226

Jump starting _________________ 208

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Engine bay, 2.8 V6

Engine: description _____________ 215

Changing engine oil_____________ 220

Engine oil: topping up ___________ 219

Oil grade and viscosity___________ 298

Engine: technical data ___________ 297

Important considerations

Cooling system, coolant capacity__ 297

Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 222

Driving in hot climates __________ 197

Temperature gauge ____________

for driving ____________________ 164

Power steering___________ 225

Fluid: checking/topping up__ 225

ABS brakes_____________ 181

Brake pads _____________ 303

Brake system ___________ 180

Brake fluid______________ 224

Vehicle identification

number________________ 307

Colour code_____________ 307

Engine number __________ 307

Warning labels___________

Gearbox number _________ 307

Changing a fuse _________ 249

Fuses _________________ 247

Relays ________________ 252

Fuse table______________ 249

Exhaust emission control __ 165

Drive belt _______________ 229

Simple troubleshooting

(A/C, ACC) _____________ 282

Alternator_______________ 229

Turbo gauge ____________ 90

Spark plugs _____________ 300

Ignition system __________ 300

Wash/wipe stalk switch____ 106

Topping-up fluid _________ 231

Washer jets_____________ 231

Washer fluid ____________ 231

Automatic transmission __________ 173

Manual gearbox________________ 172

Gearbox: technical data__________ 301

Engine oil: checking level_________ 219

Battery ______________________ 226

Battery charge ________________ 226

Jump starting _________________ 208

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Warning labels

Radiator fan:

Radiator fan may start at any

time.

A/C system:

Refrigerant at high pressure.

Do not loosen or remove the A/C system fittings before discharging the A/C

system. Improper service methods may cause personal injury. System to be

serviced by qualified personnel only. For instructions consult dealer man-

ual.

The A/C system complies with SAE J639.

Charge: 680 g R134a.

Compressor oil: 150 cc PAG oil SP-10 alt.

Saab oil 4759106

LEVEL INDICATOR

INDICATEUR DE NIVEAU

DARK

NOIR

CLEAR

CLAIR

LOW

BAS

DANGER/POISON

No sparks, flames or smoking.

700 CCA (SAE)

DANGER/POISON

700 CCA (SAE)

•

Flush eyes immediatly with water

Get medical help fast.

•

Éviter les étincelles et les flammes. Ne pas fumer.

•

Rincer immédiatement les yeux avec de

l'oau Consulter un médecin rapidement.

Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause

blindness or injury.

Protéger les yeux car les gaz explosife peuvent

causer la cécité ou des blessures.

Do not tip battery. Do not open battery

Ne pas pencher ni ouvrir la batterie.

•

Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or severe

burns.

KEEP OUT OF REACH FROM CHILDREN.

•

L'acide sulfurique peut causer la cécité ou des

brûlures graves.

GARDER HORS DE LA PORTÉE DES

ENFANTS

MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY-P/N 53 52 000

12V/700A/125min(SAE) 12V/700A/70Ah (EN)

BATTERIE SANS ENTRETIEN-P/N 53 52 000

12V/700A/125min(SAE) 12V/700A/70Ah (EN)

Saab Automobile AB 53 53 057 Manufactured by Tudor Spain (Exide Technologies)

12102-EP

Saab Automobile AB 53 53 085 Fabriquée par Tudor Espagne (Exide Technologies)

12103-EP

Battery:

• No sparks, flames or smoking

• Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause blindness or injury

• Sulphuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns

• Flush eyes immediately with water. Get medical help fast

• Do not tip battery. Do not open battery

Coolant:

Never open when engine hot!

CANADA

NETTOYERLEBOUCHON

DE REMPLISSAGE

AVANT DE L’ENLEVER.

UTILISER SEULEMENT

DU LIQUIDE DOT 4 PROV-

ENANT D’UN CONTE-

NANT SCELLÉ.

• NO SPARKS, FLAMES OR SMOKING

• SHIELD EYES

• KEEP OUT OF REACH FROM CHILDREN

• ACID

• SEE OWNER’S MANUAL

• EXPLOSIVE GAS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Jack

• Jack is designed only for changing a tire or mounting

tire snow chains.

• Vehicle must be level and jack must be placed on firm

and level ground.

• Never crawl underneath vehicle when it is jacked up.

JACKING INSTRUCTION

USA

Set parking brake and shift transmission to park.

2 Fit top of jack into jacking point next to wheel to be

changed.

Crank jack so that vehicle begins to lift.

4 Using socket wrench in tool kit, loosen wheel bolts

one-half turn.

Raise vehicle so that tire clears ground. Loosen

wheel bolts completely and remove wheel.

Mount spare wheel and tighten bolts enough so

wheel is not loose.

Lower vehicle. Tighten wheel bolts in a crisscross

sequence.

CANADA

DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur

• Children 12 and under can be killed by the airbag

• The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for children

• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in the front

• Sit as far back as possible from the airbag

• ALWAYS use SEAT BELTS and CHILD RESTRAINTS

Contact a Saab dealer if a

xenon headlight requires

replacement.

Changing wheels:

This label is only found on

cars with xenon headlights.

Use only on specified vehicle. Safe working load

2425 lbs. (1100 kg). Use on level firm ground only. Do

not get under a vehicle that is supported only by a jack,

use vehicle support stands. No persons are to remain in

the vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example of symbols that can be found in your car

No sparks,

flames or

smoking

Windshield

wipers

Coolant tem-

perature

Buckle up

Airbag

Headlights

Radiator fan

Fuel

Refer to

the Owner’s

Manual

Direction

indicators

Windshield

washers

No charge to

battery

Never place a

rear-facing

child seat in

this seat

Shield eyes

Parking lights

Defroster

Foot brake

Keep out of

reach of

children

Electric

windows

Hazard warn-

ing lights

Rear window

heating

Coolant level

Battery acid

contains sul-

phuric acid

Deactivating

ofrearwindow

switches

Engine oil

pressure

Front fog lights

Rear fog light

Cabin fan

Risk of

explosive gas

Central

locking, lock

ABS brakes

Central

locking,

unlock

Electronic

Stability

Program

Trunk lid,

opening

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Safety belts ___________

Seats ________________

Head restraints ________

Child safety ___________

Airbag________________

3 Asterisk means: equipmentnotfitted in all

cars (can depend on model variant, engine

variant, market specification, options or

accessories).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Three-point inertia-reel safety belts are

provided for all seats.

Safety belts

The results of studies show that it is equally

important to wear safety belts in the rear

seat as in the front seats.

WARNING

• Buckle up and adjust your safety belt

before driving off so that you can pay

full attention to the traffic.

Safety belt reminder

When the ignition is switched on, the safety

belt reminder in the main instrument panel

will come on if the driver has not buckled up.

In addition an audible signal sounds for 4–

8 seconds, or until the driver fastens his

belt.

The front seat passenger is reminded to

buckle up by the Saab Information Display

(SID).

• Safety belts must be worn at all times

by all occupants.

• Child safety, see page 24.

• Check that the locking tongue is prop-

erly locked in the belt lock.

Driver seat safety belt reminder

• In the event of a crash, a rear-seat

passenger not wearing a safety belt

will be thrown forward against the

front-seat backrests. The stresses

imposed on the front seat passengers

and belts are multiplied and can result

in needless injury or even death for all

car occupants.

Use your seatbelt.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

is advisable to remove thick items of

clothing.

• Refrainfromtiltingthebackrestmorethan

necessary, as the safety belt provides

better protection when the seat is in the

more upright position.

Correct position for safety belt

WARNING

Proper positioning of the safety belt is

extremely important.

• Only one person per safety belt!

• Anoutofpositionsafetybeltcanresult

in the wearer sliding underneath the

belt in a crash (submarining) and

injury can result from the lap portion

cutting into the abdomen.

• For most of the time a safety belt is worn,

theretractorwillallowthewearerfreedom

of movement. The retractor locks up auto-

matically if the belt is jerked or withdrawn

sharply, the car tilts, the brakes are

applied hard or a crash occurs.

• Never fasten the safety belt with the

shoulder belt behind the body or pull

the belt off the shoulder and under the

arm.

• Children up to 6 years of age must always

be seated in a child seat. Saab recom-

mends the use of a child seat for children

up to the age of 10.

• Children who have grown out of a child

seat should be restrained by the car’s

standardthree-pointbelts.Makesurethat

the shoulder belt is not in contact with the

neck or throat. If it is, a booster seat/cush-

ion may be necessary.

Correct seating position

• Two people must never share one

safety belt. In the event of a crash

thosesharingabeltriskbeingcrushed

together and injured.

Consider this:

• Position the lap strap snugly and low

across the hips so that it just touches the

thighs.

The shoulder strap must be as far in on

the shoulder as possible.

• Checktoensurethatthebeltisnottwisted

or rubbing against any sharp edges.

• There should not be any slack in the belt.

Pull the belt tight – particularly important

when thick outer clothing is worn. It

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

To fasten the belt

Press the red button to release the belt

The belt guide on door pillar

Press the red button on the belt buckle to

release the belt.

The front safety belts have their lower

anchorage points on the seats. The safety

belts follow the seats when the legroom is

adjusted.

Front safety belts

Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and insert-

ing the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is

securely fastened.

Belt height adjustment,

Sport Sedan and SportCombi

The belt guide on the door pillar for the front

safety belts can be set at different heights.

The front belt guide in the Convertible is not

adjustable due to the belt being incorpo-

rated into the seat.

Position the lap part low across the hips.

Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle

and pull the belt towards the shoulder to

tighten the lap belt part.

Refer to page 276 for how to check the func-

tion of the safety belts, cleaning, etc.

The belt must be as far inon the shoulder as

possible.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Adjust the belt so that it is as high up as

possible without rubbing against the neck.

To avoid chafing in the case of a short

person, the guide can be lowered until the

belt comes about an inch (a few centime-

ters) from the throat but still provides safe

restraint.

Raise the belt guide by pushing it upward to

thedesiredposition. Tolowerit,depressthe

catch release button while lowering the

guide. Check that the guide locks in its new

position.

Safety belt use during pregnancy

Pregnant women must always wear a

safety belt to protect both themselves and

the unborn child.

The lap belt should be placed low, across

the hips and over the upper thighs.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Sport Sedan and SportCombi: The front

safety belts are equipped with pretension-

ers and force limiters. The pretensioners

are activated in the event of a violent frontal

or side-on crash. The safety belt pretension-

ers are only activated if the safety belt in

question is in use but not activated should

the car roll over.

The safety belt pretensioners serve to

reduce the forward movement of the body

by tensioning the belt. The force limiters

reduce belt loads on the body by "slacken-

ing" the safety belt slightly to absorb the

body’s kinetic energy as gradually as possi-

ble. Certain variants are equipped with two-

steppretensionersandtheyservetoreduce

the forward movement of the body in the

same way as the one-step pretensioners.

Convertible:Thefrontandrearsafetybelts

are equipped with pretensioners and force

limiters. The pretensioners are activated in

the event of a violent frontal or side-on

crash. The front safety belt pretensioners

are only activated if the safety belt in ques-

tion is in use.

The safety belt pretensioners serve to

reduce the movement of the body by ten-

sioning the belt, including in a roll over

crash. The force limiters reduce belt loads

on the body by "slackening" the safety belt

slightly to absorb the body’s kinetic energy

as gradually as possible. Certain variants

are equipped with two-step pretensioners

and they serve to reduce the forward move-

ment of the body in the same way as the

one-step pretensioners.

Safety belt pretensioners

WARNING

If the car is involved in a crash, the safety

belts, belt pretensioners and other

components must be inspected and

replaced as necessary. We recommend

that you contact a Saab dealer.

Never make any alterations or repairs to

the safety belt yourself. We recommend

that you contact a Saab dealer for any

necessary repairs.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Safety belts, rear seat, Sport

Sedan and SportCombi

Safety belts rear seat, Convertible, see

page 77

WARNING

• Make sure that the belt does not

become trapped when the backrest is

folded down or raised (see page 146).

• If cargo has to be placed on a seat, it

must be properly secured with the

safetybelt. Thisreducestheriskof the

cargo being thrown about during hard

braking or a crash, which could cause

personal injury.

Rear safety belts

Press the red button on the buckle to

release the belt.

• Check that the belt is not twisted or

lying against sharp edges.

See page 276 for the checking of belt func-

tion, cleaning, etc.

• Make sure you use the correct safety

belt buckle. The buckles for the center

and left-hand rear seats are close

together.

Securing an item on the rear seat

The three rear seats all have three-point

safety belts with inertia reels.

Fasten the belts by pulling the belt across

youandinsertingthetongueintothebuckle.

Check that it is securely fastened.

Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle

and pull the belt towards the shoulder to

tighten the lap belt part.

The belt must be as far inon the shoulder as

possible.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

We recommend that adjustments to the

driver’s seat be performed in the following

order:

Seats

WARNING

1 Height

2 Legroom

3 Backrest rake angle

4 Head restraint height

Never adjust the driver’s seat except

when the car is stationary.

Lastly, adjust the position of the steering

wheel (see page 128).

Manually adjusted front seats 3

The following front seat adjustments can be

made to achieve a comfortable driving

position:

Electrically adjustable front seats 3

See page 20.

• Height 3

• Legroom

• Backrest rake angle

• Lumbar support firmness 3

• Head restraint height

Electric heating, front seats 3

See pages 114 and 123.

Height adjustment 3

Lift the lever to raise the seat. The lever is

spring-loaded to return to its neutral posi-

tion. Repeated lifting of the lever will

increase the height in steps.

Press down the lever to lower the seat.

Repeated downward presses of the lever

will lower the seat in steps.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Adjusting the legroom

Adjusting the backrest

Adjusting the lumbar support

Legroom adjustment

Lift the lever under the front of the seat and

slide the seat to the desired position.

Backrest rake angle

Lumbar support 3

Adjustthefirmnessofthelumbarsupportby

turning the knob.

WARNING

The backrest should be upright during

driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and

backrest can provide optimum protection

in the event of emergency braking or a

crash, in particular a rear-end crash.

WARNING

Check that the seat is locked in the new

position. If not, it may move while the car

is being driven and it could result in injury

to the occupant in the event of a crash.

To find the most comfortable position, turn

the knob to provide stepless adjustment of

the backrest.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Electrically adjustable front

seats 3

WARNING

• The seats are actuated by powerful

motors. Bear this in mind when adjust-

ing the seat, and make sure that noth-

inggets caughtand damaged. Ensure

thatnothingcanbetrappedbehindthe

seat when adjusting it.

• Bear in mind that children can be

injured if they play with the electrically-

operated seats.

Adjusting the height and angle

Adjusting the legroom

• Always remove the remote control

when you leave the car to prevent

personal injury caused by the electri-

cally adjustable seats, for example,

due to children playing. Electrically

adjustable front seats with memory

function, see page 21.

Height adjustment and seat

angle

Adjust the height of the seat with the rear

section of the front lever.

Adjust the angle of the seat with the front

section of the front lever.

Legroom adjustment

Adjust the legroom with the front lever.

With the doors closed the seats can only be

adjusted when the ignition is ON.

However, there are two exceptions:

• Tofacilitategettingintothecar, bothseats

can be adjusted when either of the front

doors is open.

• The seats can be adjusted up to

2 minutes after both doors have been

closed (applicable only to cars without

window and sunroof pinch protection).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Adjusting the rake angle

Adjusting the lumbar support

Driver’s seat in Sport Sedan and Sport-

Combi

Memory function buttons

Backrest rake angle

Memory function 3

WARNING

Lumbar support 3

Adjustthefirmnessofthelumbar support by

turning the knob.

WARNING

The backrest should be upright during

driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and

backrest can provide optimum protection

in the event of emergency braking or a

crash, in particular a rear-end crash.

The legroom of the electrically operated

driver’s seat can always be adjusted,

whether or not a front door is open and

irrespective of the position of the ignition

switch.

Adjust the rake angle of the backrest with

the rear lever.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

When the ignition is ON, all seat settings

canbeadjusted. Whenthedoor is open and

beforetheremote controlhas beeninserted

into the ignition switch, all seat settings can

be adjusted for up to 20 minutes.

The memory also includes the door mirror

settings.

Storing and restoring settings

1 Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.

The lumbar support is not included by

the memory function.

2 Press and hold the M-button and then

press one of the preselect buttons (1, 2

or 3). A chime will sound to confirm that

the settings have been saved.

To recall programmed settings, press and

hold the desired memory button until the

seat and door mirrors adopt their pro-

grammed positions. The memory function

also includes the door mirror settings.

To facilitate reversing, the passenger-side

door mirror can be angled down, refer to

page 132.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Therefore, the SAHR does not normally

need to be replaced or repaired after a rear-

end crash.

Head restraints

Sport Sedan and sportCombi

Head restraint, Convertible, see page 76.

The front and rear head restraints can be

raisedand lowered toa numberofpositions.

WARNING

• Raising: grasp the head restraint on both

sides and pull it straight up.

• Adjust the head restraint so that the

head is optimally supported and the

center of the head restraint is at ear

height, thus reducing the likelihood of

neck injury in a crash.

• Lowering: Press the head restraint

forward and downward.

The rear head restraints can be fully low-

ered to improve rearward vision when the

rear seats are unoccupied.

• Raise the head restraints in the seats

that are occupied.

The front seats are equipped with Saab

ActiveHeadRestraints(SAHRs).Theseare

designed to reduce the risk of neck injury if

the car is hit from behind.

The SAHR is a mechanical system, actu-

atedbybodyweight.Themechanismisbuilt

into the top of the backrest, where it is con-

nected to the head restraint.

In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is

forced back against the backrest. This, in

turn, causes the mechanism to press the

headrestraint forwardandupward, thus lim-

iting the backward movement of the head.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Child safety

WARNING

• Never leave children unattended in a

Protect children from getting

trapped in the trunk of your car

• Teach children not to play in or around

cars.

WARNING

car, even for a short time.

• Children must always be suitably

restrained in the car.

– Children can suffer heat stroke,

perhaps die, in a matter of minutes.

– Children can put the car into gear and

hurt themselves or others.

• DEATH or SERIOUS

INJURY can occur

• Watch children when loading or

unloading the car so they don´t get

locked in by mistake.

• At gas stations, take the remote

control out of the car while filling the

tank.

• Children 12 and under or

shorter than 55 inches

(140 cm) canbekilledby the

airbag

• Always lock the doors and trunk of

your car, and keep the keys out of chil-

dren´s sight and reach.

• Never allow children to climb on top of

or under motor vehicles.

• TheBACKSEATistheSAFESTplace

for children

• Keeptherearfold-downseatclosedto

help prevent children from getting into

the trunk from inside the car.

• Always look for children before back-

ing your car out of a garage or drive-

way.

• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in

the front

• To avoid carbon monoxide poisoning,

never let a car idle in an enclosed

garage.

• Sit as far back as possible from the

airbag

• ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and

CHILD RESTRAINTS

• Supervise young children around

buckets of water while washing your

car. Small children can drown in a

short time in less than an inch of water.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

The LATCH system consists of top tether

and lower anchorages . In this vehicle,

LATCH is installed at the two outboard seat-

ing positions in the rear seat, and there is a

top tether on the rear center position (not

Convertible). The top tethers are located on

top of the parcel shelf (Convertible: behind

the head restraints), see page 28. They are

covered by a lid with a child seat anchor

symbol. The lower anchorages are located

where theseat cushion andseat back come

together. There is a label above the inner

lower anchorage, see picture on next page.

Label consists of a symbol of a child

General information on child

safety

The same attention must be given to child

safety in the car as is given to adults.

Children travel most safely when properly

restrained. However, the type of restraint

must be appropriate for the size of the child.

We recommend that you always consult

your Saab dealer before fitting a child seat,

child restraint or booster cushion.

Make sure you are acquainted with the

legal requirements for seating children

in the car.

LATCH

LATCH (Lower Anchorages & Top tethers

for CHildren) is a US/Canadian safety stan-

dard for a uniform method of fitting child

restraints without using the standard safety

belts. Only certain child restraints are

equipped to utilize the LATCH system.

The LATCH system is installed in the car to

facilitate proper fitting of child restraints

designed for and equipped with LATCH

attachments.

restrained in a seat inside a circle.

Make sure that it is possible to fit a child

restraint in accordance with the manufac-

turer’s child restraint instructions.

When fitting child restraints in cars you

must always read the instructions sup-

plied by the child restraint manufacturer.

Whenfittingchildrestraintsincarsyoumust

always read the instructions supplied by the

child restraint manufacturer.

Ifyou haveany questions regardingLATCH

please contact your Saab dealer.

Saab recommends the use of a rear-

facing child seat for as long as this is

possible - at a minimum for all children

under the age of 3 (approx. 15 kg). Use a

child seat approved for the weight of the

child.

Saabrecommendstheuseofaboosterseat

for children up to the age of 10.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Lower anchorages in the rear seat, Sport Sedan and SportCombi

Lower anchorages in the rear seat, Convertible

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

LATCH child seat installation

Before starting the installation, please read

through this instruction, and the child seat

installation instruction.

1 Place the child restraint on one of the

designated outboard rear seat cush-

ions.

2 Slide the attachment on the child

restraint in between the seat cushion

and backrest.

3 Press the child restraint down on the

seat, 1 in illustration.

4 Press the child restraint rearward, lining

up the inner restraint attachment arm

with the label, 2 in illustration.

Rigid 2-point lower anchorage with top

tether

Semi-rigid 2-point lower anchorage with

top tether

5 Connect the restraint attachment arms

to the anchorages 3 in illustration.

When fitting child restraints in cars you

must always read the instructions sup-

plied by the child restraint manufacturer.

6 Follow the child restraint instructions to

confirm that both restraint attachment

arms are properly attached to the bars.

7 Attach the top tether strap to the in-car

anchorage and tighten according to the

restraint instructions, see page 28

and 30.

8 Pull the child restraint to make a second

check that the restraint is securely

attached at both the lower anchorage

bars and the top tether strap.

Only use the belt supplied with the child

restraint.

For the top tether, only use the strap sup-

plied with the child restraint.

The availability of LATCH child restraints is

limited.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Child tether anchorages for

forward facing child seats

Sport Sedan

Convertible, see page 30

WARNING

Childtoptetheranchorages aredesigned

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints.

Child tether anchorages in parcel shelf, Sport Sedan

Under no circumstances are they to be

used for adult safety belts.

The car is provided with three top tether

anchorages.Usetheonethatisrightbehind

the seating position in which the child

restraint is to be installed and attach the

restraint as follows:

7 Tighten the tether so that the back of the

child restraint is pressed hard against

the backrest.

8 Pull the child restraint to make a second

check that the restraint is securely

attached at both the lower anchorages

bars on the safety belts and the top

tether strap.

Child restraints with a tether strap must be

attached according to Canadian and U.S.

safety standards.

If you have any questions regarding child

anchorages please contact your Saab

dealer.

1 Open the cover that is right behind the

child restraint, 1 in illustration.

2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.

3 Secure the lower part of the child

restraint by means of the lower anchor-

ages or the safety belts as described in

the child restraint installation instruction.

4 Lower the headrest and route the tether

over it.

5 Attach the tether to the anchorage, 2 in

illustration.

6 Close the cover to the middle position, 3

in illustration.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Child tether anchorages for

forward facing child seats

SportCombi

WARNING

Childtoptetheranchorages aredesigned

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints.

Under no circumstances are they to be

used for adult safety belts.

3 Lower the headrest and route the tether

over it.

4 Attach the tether to the anchorage.

5 Tighten the tether so that the back of the

child restraint is pressed hard against

the backrest.

Child restraints with a tether strap must be

attached according to Canadian and U.S.

safety standards.

If you have any questions regarding child

anchorages please contact your Saab

dealer.

1 Pull the child restraint to make a second

check that the restraint is securely

attached at both the lower anchorages

bars on the safety belts and the top

tether strap

The car is provided with three top tether

anchorages. Usetheonethatisrightbehind

the seating position in which the child

restraint is to be installed and attach the

restraint as follows:

1 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.

2 Secure the lower part of the child

restraint by means of the lower anchor-

ages or the safety belts as described in

the child restraint installation instruction.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Child tether anchorages for

forward facing child seats

Convertible

WARNING

Childtoptetheranchorages aredesigned

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints.

How to take away the head restraint

1 Raise the head restraint

2 Push the catch forward and pull the head

restraint straight upward

Top tether anchorages in the rear seat

Under no circumstances are they to be

used for adult safety belts.

Child restraints with a tether strap must be

attached according to Canadian and U.S.

safety standards.

If you have any questions regarding child

anchorages please contact your Saab

dealer.

The car is provided with two top tether

anchorages. Usetheonethatisrightbehind

the seating position in which the child

restraint is to be installed and attach the

restraint as follows:

ages or the safety belts as described in

the child restraint installation instruction.

4 Attach the tether to the anchorage.

WARNING

5 Tighten the tether so that the back of the

child restraint is pressed hard against

the backrest.

6 Pull the child restraint to make a second

check that the restraint is securely

attached at both the lower anchorages

bars on the safety belts and the top

tether strap.

If the size of the child restraint makes it

impossible to put the head restraint back

on, place it in the trunk.

1 Remove the head restraint on the seat-

ing position where the child restraint

shall be fitted.

2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.

3 Secure the lower part of the child

restraint by means of the lower anchor-

7 Puttheheadrestraintbackonandmake

sure it is secure mounted. Adjust it in its

highest position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Iffittingachildrestraintthatisintendedtobe

secured in position by the standard safety

belt, make use of the locking function of the

belt.

Locking the belt lessens the risk that the

seat will work loose while the car is in

motion.

The safety belt locking function will be deac-

tivated when the safety belt is retracted.

Installation of child restraint

using the standard safety belt

1 Disengage the safety belt latch from the

buckle.

2 Disengage the safety belt from the child

restraint, according to the instructions

from the child restraint manufacturer.

WARNING

Failure to follow all the manufacturer’s

instructions on the use of child restraint

systemscan cause yourchildto strike the

vehicle´s interior during a sudden stop or

crash.

1 Position the child restraint in the back

seat.

2 Route the belt in the restraint according

to the installation instruction of the

restraint.

3 Pull out the belt completely until it stops.

Then let the belt slowly pull in the slack.

Clicking sound indicates that the lock

function is in work.

4 Pull the shoulder belt tight to secure the

child restraint in position.

3 Let the safety belt retract until the click-

ing sound ceases.

Child restraints that are approved for rear-

ward facing installation in the rear seat can

be positioned in any of the three rear places.

Make sure that it is possible to fit it in accor-

dance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

When fitting child restraints in cars you

must always read the instructions sup-

plied by the child restraint manufacturer.

5 Check for correct locking function by

pulling on the belt. The belt must not

unreel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

There are two impact sensors on the front

bumper, under the lacquered shell. Very

soon after the moment of impact, these

Using this information and data from the

central sensor in the control module, the

controlmoduledetermineswhetherornotto

inflate the airbags. The control module also

controls whether other components of the

airbag system are to be deployed: safety

beltpretensioners,inflatablecurtains(Sport

Sedan and SportCombi) and roll over bars

(Convertible).

Which airbag system components are

deployed depends on a number of factors,

such as the force of the crash and the angle

of impact.

If the airbag system registers forces equiv-

alenttoahigh-speedcrash(airbagsinflated

to Stage II), the inflatable curtains will also

beactivated(SportSedanandSportCombi)

see page 42.

Airbag system components

Airbag

• Airbag in steering wheel

• Airbag in instrument panel in front of

passenger seat

• Side airbags in front seat backrests

Convertible: The side airbags help

protect the head also

• Inflatablecurtainsalonglengthofheadlin-

ing (from front to rear roof pillars)

(Sport Sedan only)

WARNING

To reduce risk of death or serious injury:

• Always wear your safety belt.

• Safety belt pretensioners for front seats

Convertible: and outer rear seats.

• Always adjust your seat so that you

are as far back as possible but still

able to operate the pedals and reach

the steering wheel and controls

comfortably.

The airbag system supplements the protec-

tion provided by the safety belts to further

enhance the safety of occupants taller than

55 in. (140 cm).

Whenthesystemisactivatedatthemoment

of impact, the airbag inflates and then

deflates through holes in the back. The

whole operation takes roughly 0.1 second,

quicker than the blink of an eye.

The steering wheel and passenger airbags

are so-called smart airbags. The driver and

passenger airbag system compensates for

safety belt usage and the force of the crash

at the moment of impact.

• Passengers 12 and under or shorter

than 55 inches (140 cm) must always

travelintherearseatasthecarisfitted

with a passenger airbag.

• Never fit a child seat in front of the

passenger airbag.

If a fault arises in the airbag system during

a journey, the airbag warning lamp on the

main instrument panel will come on and the

Saab Information Display (SID) will display:

Airbag malfunction.

Contact Saab dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Inflated airbag (driver’s side).

Inflation and deflation of airbag takes

approx. 0.1 s

Both front airbags inflated

The driver and passenger front airbags are

triggeredby violent front-endcrashes. They

are not activated by minor front-end

impacts, if the car overturns or by rear- and

side-impacts.

Note:

Impact sensors react differently depending

on whether or not the front safety belts on

the driver’s and passenger sides are used.

Situations can therefore arise where only

oneoftheairbagsinflates. It isalsopossible

for only the safety belt pretensioners to be

activated and for the airbags to remain unin-

flated.

The car is equipped as standard with

a passenger airbag.

If only Stage I is activated at the moment of

impact, Stage II will automatically be acti-

vatedlatertoneutralizethegas generatorin

the airbag.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Airbag system

Accessories and other equipment must

not be fitted to the surfaces marked as

these are where the airbags inflate in the

event of a crash.

1 Steering wheel with integral airbag

2 Passenger airbag

3 Side airbag

4 Inflatable curtain (Sport Sedan and SportCombi)

5 Sensors in front bumper

6 Sensor, side-impact protection

7 Sensor, side-impact protection (Sport Sedan and SportCombi)

8 Electronic control module and central sensor (SDM)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

• Never attach anything to the steering

wheel or passenger side of the instru-

ment panel, as this could result in

injury if the airbag should inflate. The

same applies to anything you might

haveinyourmouth, suchas apipe, for

instance.

• If the airbag warning light

remains

WARNING

on after the car has been started or

comes on while you are driving, have

the car checked immediately. We

recommend that you contact a Saab

dealer. The warning light could signify

that the airbags may not inflate in a

crash, or they could even inflate with-

out a crash. See page 87.

• Even if the car is equipped with

AIRBAGS, safety belts must still

always be worn by all occupants.

• Note that because an airbag inflates

and deflates extremely rapidly, it will

not provide protection against a

second impact occurring in the same

incident. Always use your safety belt.

• Some components of the airbag will

be warm for a short time. In some

circumstances the airbag can cause

minor burns or abrasions to the body

when the airbag inflates/deflates.

• Fumes are generated by the chemical

reaction that inflates the airbag.

Skin surfaces that show signs of irrita-

tion should be washed with clean

water and a mild soap as soon as

possible.

In the event of eye irritation, flush the

eyesthoroughlywithcleanwaterforat

least 20 minutes.

• Always sit with the whole of your back

incontactwiththebackrestoftheseat,

and with your seat as far back as is

practical.Otherwise you will be thrown

back against the backrest when the

airbag inflates which could cause you

injury or death. The airbag needs

room in which to inflate.

• Never rest your hands or forearms on

the steering-wheel center padding.

In case of persistent irritation, consult

a doctor.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Operation of the steering wheel airbag in

a front-end crash

Front passenger seat

WARNING

• DEATH or SERIOUS

INJURY can occur

Moment of impact.

• Children 12 and under or

shorter than 55 inches

(140 cm)can be killedby the

airbag

Never secure a rear-facing child seat in

the right front seat of a car equipped with

apassengerairbag. Inflationoftheairbag

in the event of a crash could seriously

injure or kill a child.

Sensors detect a

deceleration and send

a signal via the control

module to a gas gen-

erator that inflates the

airbag.

• TheBACKSEATistheSAFESTplace

for children

• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in

the front

The system is the same as that used on the

driver’s side.

The airbag systems are interconnected and

• Sit as far back as possible from the

airbag

• ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and

CHILD RESTRAINTS

have a common warning light

. The pas-

The inflating airbag

cushions the driver.

senger airbag module is housed in the

fascia above the glove box and is marked

"AIRBAG".

Both airbags will be inflated in the event of a

moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal

crash, even if the passenger seat is unoccu-

pied.

• Never allow a child to stand in front of

the seat or to sit on the lap of a front

seat passenger. Serious injury or

death could result if the airbag is

inflated in a crash.

Airbag now fully

inflated.

• The glove box must be closed while

travelling. An open glove box door

could cause leg injuries in the event of

a crash.

The car is equipped as standard with

a passenger airbag.

The airbag starts to

deflate.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Passenger Sensing System

• Neverplaceanything onthedashorin

frontoftheseatas, in additionto being

a hazard to passengers, this could

interferewiththe function of the airbag

in the event of a crash. The same

appliestothemountingofaccessories

on the dash.

Vehicles with a passenger sensing system

have indicator LEDs on the facia. The indi-

cators will be lit during the system check.

When the system check is complete, either

the ON or the OFF LED, will be lit. See

Airbag warning light on page 87. If your

vehicle does not have the indicators pic-

tured, then your vehicle does not have the

passenger sensing system.

• Keep feet on the floor – never put feet

up on the dash, on the seat or out of

the window.

The passenger sensing system will turn off

the right front passenger’s frontal airbag

under certain conditions.

• Do not carry anything in your lap.

The driver’s airbag and the side airbags are

not part of the passenger sensing system.

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator

The passenger sensing system works with

sensors that are part of the right front pas-

senger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors

are designed to detect the presence of a

properly-seated occupant and determine if

the passenger’s frontal airbag should be

enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are

safer if they are restrained in the rear rather

than the front seat.

Saab recommends that child restraints be

secured in a rear seat, including an infant

riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child

riding in a forward-facing child seat and an

older child riding in a booster seat.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accom-

modate a rear-facing child restraint. A label

on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-

facing child seat in the front.” This is

becausetherisktotherear-facingchildisso

great, if the airbag deploys.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

The passenger sensing system is designed

to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal

airbag if:

When the passenger sensing system has

turned off the passenger’s frontal air bag,

the off indicator will light and stay lit to

remind you that the airbag is off.

If a child restraint has been installed and the

on indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off.

Remove the child restraint from the vehicle

and reinstall the child restraint following the

childrestraintmanufacturer’sdirectionsand

refer to Installation of child restraint using

the standard safety belt on page 31.

If after reinstalling the child restraint and

restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still

lit, check to make sure that the vehicle’s

seatback is not pressing the child restraint

into the seat cushion. If this happens,

slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and

adjust the seat cushion if possible. Also

make sure the child restraint is not trapped

under the vehicle head restraint. If this hap-

pens, adjust the head restraint.

WARNING

• the right front passenger seat is unoccu-

pied

• the system determines that an infant is

present in a rear-facing infant seat

• the system determines that a small child

is present in a forward-facing child

restraint

• the system determines that a small child

is present in a booster seat

• a right front passenger takes his/her

weight off of the seat for a period of time

• the right front passenger seat is occupied

by a smaller person, such as a child who

has outgrown child restraints

• or if there is a critical problem with the

airbag system or the passenger sensing

system.

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can

be seriously injured or killed if the right

front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is

because the back of the rear-facing child

restraint would be very close to the inflat-

ing airbag.

Even though the passenger sensing

system is designed to turn off the passen-

ger’s frontalairbagifthesystem detects a

rear-facing child restraint, no system is

fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that

an airbag will not deploy under some

unusual circumstance, even though it is

turned off. Saab recommends that rear-

facing child restraints be secured in the

rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child

in the child restraint in a rear seat position in

the vehicle and check with your dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

The passenger sensing system is designed

to enable (may inflate) the right front

passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the

system senses that a person of adult size is

sittingproperly in the rightfront passenger’s

seat. When the passenger sensing system

hasallowedtheairbagtobeenabled, theon

indicator will light and stay lit to remind you

that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown child

restraints and for very small adults, the pas-

senger sensing system may or may not turn

off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag,

depending upon the person’s seating pos-

ture and body build. Everyone in your vehi-

cle who has outgrown child restraints

should wear a safety belt properly —

whether or not thereis an airbag for that per-

son.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right

front passenger’s seat, but the off indicator

is lit, it could be because that person is not

sitting properly in the seat. If this happens,

turn the vehicle off and ask the person to

place the seatback in the fully upright posi-

tion, then sit upright in the seat, centered on

the seat cushion, with the person’s legs

comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle

and have the person remain in this position

for about two minutes. This will allow the

system to detect that person and then

enable the passenger’s airbag.

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat

covers, can affect how well the passenger

sensing system operates. You may want to

consider not using seat covers or other

aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has

the passenger sensing system. See Adding

Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehi-

cleformoreinformationaboutmodifications

that can affect how the system operates.

WARNING

Stowingof articles under the passenger’s

seat or between the passenger’s seat

cushion and seatback may interfere with

the proper operation of the passenger

sensing system.

WARNING

If the airbag readiness light in the instru-

ment panel cluster ever comes on and

stays on, it means that something may be

wrong with the airbag system. If this ever

happens, havethe vehicle serviced

promptly, because an adult-size person

sitting in the right front passenger’s seat

may not have the protection of the frontal

airbag. See Airbag warning lamp on

page 43 for more on this, including impor-

tant safety information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Head protection

Side-impact protection

WARNING

• Theside-impactprotectionwillonlybe

activated in the event of a side-on

crash and not in the event of a rear-

end crash or the car rolling over. For

the Convertible’s Roll-over protection

see page 78.

The pillar trim and headlining (not Converti-

ble soft top) are designed to absorb energy,

softening possible blows to the head. After

acrash, theseitems must be changed in the

seat positions that were occupied. Never fit

accessories to the pillar trim or headlining

as these could reduce the effectiveness of

the head protection and inflatable curtain

(Sport Sedan and SportCombi).

• Damage or wear to the seat cover, or

the seat seam, in the area of the side

airbag must be repaired immediately.

We recommend that you contact a

Saab dealer.

• This car is equipped with side airbags

and no extra seat cover should be

fitted. Failure to observe this warning

could result in the side airbags not

inflating as intended and thus not

providing the intended protection

either.

The side airbags, which help protect the

upper body (head also in Convertible), are

integrated in the outside edges of the front

seat backrests. The side impact protection

of the Sport Sedan also includes inflatable

curtains (see page 42).

The side impact protection will be activated

if certain predetermined conditions are met

such as the force and angle of the impact,

the speed of the car on impact, and at which

point on the car´s side the impact occurs.

• Never placeany objectinthe areathat

would be occupied by the inflated air-

bag.

• For optimum protection, sit upright in

theseat, withyoursafety beltcorrectly

fastened.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

The side-impact protection is only activated

on the side of impact, while the safety belt

pretensioners on both sides are deployed.

The front seats and outer rear seats have

safety belt pretensioners.

There are two sensors on each side of the

car, one at the rear of each door sill and one

in the lower part of each C-pillar.

Convertible: The Convertible has two side

impactprotectionsensors,oneoneachside

of the car. These are located at the rear of

the sills.

Inflated side airbag and inflatable curtain,

Sport Sedan and SportCombi

Inflated side airbag with head protection,

Convertible

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Inflatable curtains, Sport Sedan

and SportCombi

• Do not position a sun visor or similar

item in the area that would be filled by

the inflatable curtain.

WARNING

• To reduce the risk of head injuries in

the event of a crash, the roof pillars

andheadliningincorporatecushioning

material. Do not attach anything to the

car’s headlining, roof pillars or side

panels as this could prevent the side-

impact protection from providing the

intended protection.

• Do not sit with your head resting

against the side window. The inflat-

able curtain is designed to inflate

between the window and the head.

Resting the head against the window

could prevent the inflatable curtain

from providing the intended

protection.

• Do not stack loads so high that they

could encumber the inflatable curtain

in the event of a crash.

Inflated inflatable curtain, Sport Sedan

• Hang only light clothes from the hooks

ontherearseatcourtesyhandles.The

items of clothing must not contain

heavy or sharp objects. Do not use

wire coat hangers.

The inflatable curtains, which protect the

head, are concealed along the lengths of

the headlining (all the way from front to rear

roof pillars).

The inflatable curtains inflate at the same

time as the side airbags in the front seats in

case of a side-on impact.

The inflatable curtains reduce the risk of

head injuries to the occupants of the car’s

outer seats. The inflatable curtains deploys

into the window area between the front and

rear roof pillars.

If the airbag system registers forces equiv-

alent to a high-speed frontal crash (Stage II

for the steering wheel and passenger

airbags), the inflatable curtains will also be

deployed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Airbag warning lamp

WARNING

What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates?

After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,

so quickly that some people may not even

realize the airbag inflated. Some compo-

nents of the airbag module - the steering

wheel hub for the driver's frontal airbag, the

instrument panel for the right front passen-

ger's frontal airbag or the ceiling of your

vehicle near the side windows - will be hot

for a short time. The parts of the bag that

come into contact with you may be warm,

but not too hot to touch. There will be some

smoke and dust coming from the vents in

the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does

not prevent the driver from seeing or being

able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop

people from leaving the vehicle.

• If the airbag readiness light stays on

after you start your vehicle, it means

the airbag system may not be working

properly. See page 87.

• The airbags in your vehicle may not

inflate in a crash, or they could even

inflate without a crash.

• To help avoid injury to yourself or

others, have your vehicle serviced

right away if the airbag readiness light

stays on after you start your vehicle.

Prohibited seating position

For optimal protection, do not sit too close to

the door. Bear this in mind, for example, if

someone is sleeping in the car. The inflat-

able curtain comes down from the headlin-

ing and covers a large portion of the side

windows.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

• Let only qualified technicians work on

yourairbagsystem. Improperservicecan

mean that your airbag system will not

work properly. See your dealer for

service.

Notice: If you damage the covering for

thedriver'sortherightfrontpassenger's

airbag, or the side impact airbag cover-

ing on the ceiling near the sidewindows,

the bag may not work properly. You may

have to replace the airbag module in the

steering wheel, both the airbag module

and the instrument panel for the right

front passenger's airbag, or side impact

airbag module and ceiling covering for

the roof-mounted side impact airbag. Do

not open or break the airbag coverings.

Servicing the airbag system

The airbag system must be inspected as

part of the normal service program but oth-

erwise may be regarded as maintenance-

free.

WARNING

When an airbag inflates, there is dust in

the air. This dust could cause breathing

problems for people with a history of

asthma or other breathing trouble. To

avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should

get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you

have breathing problems but can not get

out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates,

then get fresh air by opening a window or

a door. If you experience breathing prob-

lemsfollowinganairbagdeployment, you

should seek medical attention.

Inmanycrashessevereenoughtoinflatean

airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle

deformation. Additional windshield break-

age may also occur from the right front pas-

senger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.

After an airbag inflates, you will need

some new parts for your airbag system. If

you do not get them, the airbag system

will not be there to help protect you in

another crash. A new system will include

airbag modules and possibly other parts.

The service manual for your vehicle

covers the need to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash

sensing and diagnostic module which

records information after a crash. See

Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data

Recorders on page 292.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

In addition, airbags provide no protection

against a secondary impact occurring in the

same incident. So there is no doubt about

the benefit of wearing safety belts at all

times.

Do not sit too close to the airbag: it needs

room to inflate.

The airbag inflates very quickly and power-

fully in order to protect an adult, before they

are thrown forward, in a serious frontal

crash.

How do I position the seat to leave room for

the airbag to inflate?

Scrapping or working on airbag

and belt pretensioners

Frequently asked questions on

function of the airbag

Do you still need to wear a safety belt if air-

bags are fitted?

Yes, always! The airbag system compo-

nents merely supplement the car’s normal

safety system. Moreover, the front airbags

willonlybeactuatedinamoderatetosevere

frontal, or near-frontal crash, which means,

of course, that they provide no protection in

minor frontal crashes, major rear- or side-

crashes or if the car rolls over.

WARNING

• Under no circumstances should any

modifications be made that affect the

steering wheel or the airbag’s electri-

cal circuitry.

• During any welding, both battery

cables must be disconnected and

covered.

The safety belts help to reduce the sideway

movement of the body in a crash.

Don’t have your seat too far forward.

• Beforequick dryingpaintinthevicinity

of the electronic control module, the

module’s grounding points and wiring

must be covered.

Recline the seat back to increase the dis-

tancebetweenyouandtheairbag.Forshort

drivers, specialaccessorypedalextensions

are available through your Saab dealer.

Airbags inflate extremely rapidly and with

great force – to be fast enough to protect an

adult in the seat.

But they also ensure that, if a crash occurs

in which the airbags are inflated, the airbag

will make the optimum contact with the

occupant, i.e. squareonfromthefront. If the

occupant meets the airbag in an offset posi-

tion, the protection afforded will be reduced.

• Airbags and safety belt pretensioners

must be deployed under controlled

conditions before the car is scrapped

oranyofthesystem’scomponentsare

removed. Airbags or belt pretension-

ers that have been deployed as a

result of a crash must be replaced by

new ones.

• Airbag-system components must

neverbetransferredforuseinanother

vehicle.

• All work involving the scrapping or

replacement of airbags or belt preten-

sioners must be carried out by autho-

rized personnel only.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

When do the airbags in the steering wheel

and passenger side of the dash board

inflate?

Theairbagwillonlybeinflatedundercertain

predetermined conditions in a moderate to

severe frontal, or near-frontal crash,

depending on such factors as the force and

angle of the impact, the speed of the car on

impact, andtheresistancetodeformationof

the impacting object.

How loud is the inflation?

What should I do if the AIR-BAG warning

light comes on?

The noise of the inflation is certainly loud,

but it is of an very short duration and will not

damage your hearing. For a short time after-

wards you could experience a buzzing

noise in your ears.

Most people who have experienced it

cannot remember the noise of the inflation

at all – all they remember is the noise of the

crash.

If the warning lightis on, it means that a fault

has been detected in the system. The

airbag cannot be relied on to operate as

intended and it might even be activated

erroneously. You should therefore take the

car to a workshop. We recommend that you

contact a Saab dealer as soon as possible.

The airbag canonly beactivated once in the

same incident.

Do not attempt to drive the car after an

airbag has been inflated, even if it is possi-

ble.

Can you still use a child seat in the front if a

passenger airbag is installed?

Definitely not!

Children 12 and under or shorter than

55 inches (140 cm) can be killed by the air-

bag.

What won’t trigger the airbag?

The airbag will not be activated in all frontal

crashes. For instance, if the car has hit

somethingrelativelysoftandyielding(e.g. a

snow drift or a hedge) or a solid object at a

low impact speed, the airbag will not neces-

sarily be triggered.

The back seat is the safest place for chil-

dren.

Never put a rear-facing child seat in the

front.

Sit as far back as possible from the airbag.

Always use seat belts and child restraints.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

Are the dust and fumes given off when the

airbag operates at all harmful?

Because I have a disability, I have to get my

vehiclemodified. HowcanIfindoutwhether

this will affect my advanced airbag system?

Changing or moving any parts of the front

seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and

diagnostic module or the inside rearview

mirror can affect the operation of the

advanced airbag system. If you have ques-

tions, call Customer Assistance. The phone

numbers and addresses for Customer

Assistance can be found on page 290.

Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle

Is there anything I might add to the front or

sides of the vehicle that could keep the air-

bags from working properly?

Yes. Ifyouadd things that changeyour vehi-

cle’s frame, bumper system, front end or

side sheet metal or height, they may keep

the airbag system from working properly.

Also, the airbag system may not work prop-

erly if you relocate any of the airbag sen-

sors. If you have any questions about this,

you should contact Saab Customer Assis-

tance before you modify your vehicle. The

phone numbers and addresses for Cus-

tomer Assistance can be found on page

290.

Most people who have remained in a car

with little or no ventilation for several min-

utes complained only of minor irritation of

the throat and eyes. Avoid as much as pos-

sible getting dust on your skin as there is a

risk of skin irritation.

If you suffer from asthma, the incident may

bringonanattack, in which case youshould

follow the normal procedure advised by

your doctor. It is advisable to consult a

doctor afterwards.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety

(This page has been left blank.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Security

Doors ________________

Central locking ________

Car alarm _____________

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,

market specification, options or accessories).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Security

A key code number is supplied with your

car. This number needs to be quoted for

ordering a new traditional key (contained in

the remote control). Therefore, keep this

number in a safe place.

The remote control contains an electronic

code that is unique to your car. When the

remote control is inserted into the ignition

switch, this code is checked. If the code is

incorrect, the car will not start.

Doors

Central locking

Open the door by lifting the door handle.

The following message appears on the

Saab Information Display (SID) if a door is

not closed (text displayed first when vehicle

speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) and the

door has still not been closed):

WARNING

Leaving children or pets unattended in a

locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-

ous to leave children in a vehicle with the

ignition key. A child or others could be

badly injured or even killed.

Close doors.

The car is supplied with two remote con-

trols. It is possible to have up to five remote

controls programmed for the car at any one

time. If one is lost, a replacement should be

obtained as soon as possible. We recom-

mendthat youcontacta Saabdealer. When

a new key is programmed into the car, the

lost key will be deprogrammed automati-

cally.

Remote control

The remote control and ignition key are inte-

grated in one unit, and referred to in this

manual as the remote control.

The remote control contains a mechanical

key, referred to in this manual as the tradi-

tional key. This traditional key can be used

in an emergency to lock or unlock the

driver’s door from outside (see page 52).

This key does not fit the ignition switch.

Note:

If a new remote control has to be ordered

and programmed, at least one old one is

required for the locking system’s electronic

unit to recognize the new (ordered) remote

control.

Once the new remote control has been pro-

grammed, the old unit that is lost will not

work. Therefore you should carry two

remote controls separately, especially on

long journeys.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Security

Remote control functions

Button Pressed once Pressed

twice

Hold and

NOTICE

press the

buttonmore

than 2 s

The remote control contains delicate

electronics.

Locks all doors.

• Do not expose it to water.

• Avoid rough handling.

Unlocks driver´s Sport Sedan: Comfort

door.

The other

doors are

unlocked.

opening, see

page 129.

• Do not place the remote control where

it may be subjected to high tempera-

tures, e.g. on the instrument panel.

SportCombi:

The other

doors and tail-

gate are

• Warm the remote control in your

hands for a couple of minutes if it has

become very cold to prevent malfunc-

tion.

unlocked.

Remote control

1 Locks car

2 Unlocks car and turns on cabin lighting

3 Unlocks and opens trunk lid.

4 Turns on exterior and cabin lighting.

Activates panic function

Sport Sedan:

Unlocks and

slightly opens

the trunk lid.

• For details on changing the battery,

refer to page 56.

SportCombi:

Unlocks the tail-

gate.

Checks number

of remote con-

trols, see

page 55.

Turnsonexterior

and cabin light-

ing*)(for30 s)or

turns off lighting

and deactivates

panic alarm.

Panic alarm

(activates

alarm manu-

ally), see

page 60.

*) parking lights, side direction indicators,

taillights and license plate lighting.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Security

Remote unlocking

Locking/unlocking the car

Pressing the

door is unlocked.

button once: the driver´s

WARNING

Pressin a second time:

Leaving children or pets unattended in a

locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-

ous to leave children in a vehicle with the

ignition key. A child or others could be

badly injured or even killed.

Sport Sedan: the rest of the doors are

unlocked.

SportCombi: the rest of the doors and tail-

gate are unlocked.

The hazard warning lights will flash twice to

confirm.

Never lock anyone in the car.

Saab Information Display (SID), see

page 93.

Remote locking and unlocking also control

the car alarm.

Locking/unlocking the front left-hand door

Intermittent malfunctioning

with the traditional key

Remote locking

Equipment in thevicinity of the car that uses

the same frequency as the remote control

may cause interference to the remote con-

trol signal. In this case, retry from another

angle and aim at the receiver located by the

steering wheel.

1 Lock

2 Unlock

Press the

button once:

Sport Sedan: all doors locked.

SportCombi: all doors and tailgate locked.

The hazard warning lights will flash once to

confirm.

If remote unlocking should fail to work

1 Remove the traditional key from the

remote control by pressing the emblem

on the reverse of the remote control.

(This key only fits the front left-hand

door.)

2 Unlock the door with the key.

The car alarm will be tripped. To silence the

alarm, insert the remote control into the igni-

tion switch.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Security

Locking a car with dead battery

Trunk lid/Tailgate

Opening

Sport Sedan: The trunk lid is unlocked and

The steering wheel lock requires sufficient

battery voltage to lock and unlock. If the bat-

tery voltage drops below a certain level

while the remote control is in the ignition

switch, you will not be able to remove the

remote control.

slightly opened when the button on the

remotecontrolorontheinsideofthedriver’s

door is pressed once.

SportCombi: The tailgate is unlocked (not

If you must leave the car, proceed as

follows:

opened)whenthe

buttonontheremote

control or on the inside of the driver’s door

is pressed once.

1 Lock the car by pressing down the lock

buttons on the doors.

The hazard warning lights will flash three

times to confirm.

2 Lock the front left door from outside with

the traditional key (see page 52). The

car is now locked but the car alarm will

remain inactive.

Opening button on driver’s door

Closing

Sport Sedan: The trunk lid is locked when

closed.

SportCombi: The tailgate is not locked

when closed. It is locked together with the

doors when

button on the remote con-

trol is pressed once.

If the doors are locked when the trunk lid is

closeditisarmedandthemovementsensor

in the cabin will be armed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Security

Switches on front doors

The central locking can also be operated

from inside the car using the button by each

front door handle.

Locking the car with the remote control ren-

ders these buttons inoperative.

SportSedan:Ifyouaresittinginthecarand

pressing the

button on the driver’s

door, the driver’s door will unlock. Pressing

the button a second time will unlock the

remaining doors.

SportWagon: If you are sitting in the car

and pressing the

button on the driver’s

Central locking switch

Child safety locks

door, the driver’s door will unlock. Pressing

the button a second time will unlock the

remaining doors and the tailgate.

Child safety locks

The rear doors are equipped with child

safety locks that are activated by means of

a catch next to the door latch.

The button on the passenger door works in

the same way except that this first unlocks

the passenger door. During this operation

the rear doors remain locked.

Insert a screwdriver or the traditional key

(enclosed in the remote control) and turn it

45° in the direction shown on the label on

the door.

When the child safety lock is in the locked

position, the door can only be opened from

outside the car.

If the car is left withoneor more doors open,

the interior lighting will be switched off auto-

maticallyafter20 minutes.Thisistoprevent

the battery from running flat. Also, if the car

has electrically adjustable seats, these will

cease to operate.

WARNING

If small children are carried in the rear

seat, the safety locks on the rear doors

should be activated to prevent uninten-

tional opening from the inside.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Security

Trunk Release Handle

Reprogramming lock system

functions

There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release

handle located inside the trunk on the latch.

This handle will glow following exposure to

light. Pull the release handle down to open

the trunk from inside.

Certain lock system functions can be

reprogrammed. We recommend that you

contact a Saab dealer (see page 309).

Checking the number of remote

controls

Tocheckthenumberofremotecontrolsthat

are programmed for the car:

NOTICE

The trunk release handle was not

designed to be used to tie down the trunk

lid or as an anchor point when securing

items in the trunk. Improper use of the

trunk release could damage it

1 Inserttheremotecontrolintotheignition

switch and turn it to ON.

2 Press and hold the

button for more

Trunk Release Handle

than 2 seconds within 30 seconds after

the ignition switch has been turned to

the ON position.

3 The Saab Information Display (SID) will

now display the number of remote

controls that are programmed for your

car, and which of these (1–5) is in the

ignition switch.

Example of SID message:

2: standard key

Key No: 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Security

Battery type: For optimum performance in

alltemperaturesandgoodservicelife,Saab

recommends the use of a Sony or Pana-

sonic CR2032, 3V lithium battery.

Changing the key battery

WARNING

The battery should last for about 4 years of

normal use.

The battery type is marked on the inside of

the remote control. Avoid leaving finger-

prints on the faces of the battery.

Keep the battery and other small compo-

nents of theremote control out of reach of

children.

1 Press the emblem on the reverse of the

remote control to remove the traditional

key.

NOTICE

The electronics of the remote control are

sensitiveto electrostatic discharge. Incor-

rect handling when changing the battery

can damage the remote control. Avoid

touching electronic components of the

remote control with your hands.

Press the emblem to remove

the traditional key

2 Insertthetipof the key intothesmall slot

and turn the key to split the remote

control.

When the voltage of the remote control bat-

tery drops below a certain level, the Saab

Information Display (SID) will display:

Remote control battery

low. Replace battery.

Change the battery as soon as possible to

avoid malfunctioning.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Security

5 After changing the battery in the remote

control, it is only possible to use the

remotecontrolalimitednumber oftimes

before synchronization with the car is

lost. Therefore, do not press the buttons

ontheremotecontrolrepeatedlydirectly

after changing the battery.

Unlock the car and insert the remote

control into the ignition switch to

synchronize the remote control and car.

Immobilizer

The remote control contains an electronic

code that is unique to your car. When the

remote control is inserted into the ignition

switch, this code is checked and the LED on

the dashboard double-flashes for

3 seconds. Ifthecodeiscorrect, thecar can

be started.

Each time you remove the remote control

from the ignition, the electronic starting

interlock is activated, the LED double-

flashes for 3 seconds and the car becomes

immobilized.Ifanincorrectremotecontrolis

now inserted into the ignition switch (e.g.

the remote control of another car), the

immobilizer will remain operative (the LED

will not flash for 3 s) and it will not be possi-

ble to start the car.

If the central locking system does not work

after changing the battery and the car is

locked, proceed as follows:

1 Unlock the front left door with the tradi-

tional key. If the car has a car alarm, this

will be tripped.

2 Open the door and insert the remote

control into the ignition switch. If the car

has a car alarm, this will be silenced.

The remote control and receiver unit are

now synchronized.

Change the battery and fit together

the two halves of the remote control

3 Change the battery. Fit the new battery

so that it is positioned in the same way

as the old battery, with the positive (+)

side facing down.

4 Fit the two halves of the remote control

together and press them together until

you hear several clicks. Avoid pressing

the buttons. Reinsert the traditional key

into the remote control.

If the immobilizer system malfunctions, the

Saab Information Display (SID) displays:

Immobilizer failure.

Try starting again.

Contact Saab dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Security

If, when inserted into the ignition switch,

there is a problem checking the electronic

code of the remote control, the following

message will appear on the SID:

Thealarmisarmed11 secondsafterthecar

has been locked by remote control.

During the delay period, the LED shines

constantly. It will then start to flash once

every 3 seconds. The LED is located on the

dashboard.

If a door or the trunk lid is open when the car

is locked with the remote control, the LED

will flash 3 times per second for

11 seconds. Check that the doors, hood

and trunk lid are closed.

Car alarm

WARNING

Leaving children or pets unattended in a

locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-

ous to leave children in a vehicle with the

ignition key. A child or others could be

badly injured or even killed.

Key not accepted.

Contact Saab dealer.

Visit a Saab dealer to have the problem

checked and rectified.

If the signal persists, contact a Saab dealer

to have the problem checked and rectified.

The car alarm is armed when the car is

locked with the remote control.

The car alarm will not be armed if you

lock the car with the traditional key (see

page 52).

Locking the trunk lid:

Sport Sedan: If you open the trunk lid from

All the doors, the hood and the trunk lid are

monitored by the alarm.

outside the car with the

button on the

remote control, you must lock the car with

the button to arm the car alarm.

SportCombi: If you unlock and/or open the

trunk lid from outside the car with the

button on the remote control, you must lock

the car with the

alarm.

button to arm the car

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Security

Toavoidanyinconvenience,makesurethat

anyoneusingthecar is familiar withhow the

car alarm and the locking system work.

If the alarm has been tripped since the car

was last locked, the Saab Information Dis-

play (SID) will display:

Arming the car alarm

Thealarmisarmedwhenalldoors, thehood

and the trunk lid are closed and you lock the

car with the remote control.

What trips the alarm?

The alarm will be tripped if:

• a door, the hood or the trunk lid is opened

• somebody tries to hotwire the car

Signals when the alarm is tripped

If the alarm is triggered, the following alarm

signals will be set off:

Alarm has been triggered

since being armed.

• all direction indicators flash for 5 minutes.

• the horn sounds for 30-second intervals

with 10-second breaks (max. 10 cycles).

If a fault arises in the car alarm system, the

Saab Information Display (SID) will display:

The signals can vary between markets

and due to legal and insurance require-

ments.

Theft protection failure.

Contact Saab dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Security

Switching off the alarm if tripped

Panic function

The car alarm includes a panic function.

This function allows the alarm to be started

manually, for example, to attract attention.

The panic alarm can only be activated while

the car is stationary. The alarm is silenced if

the car is driven off.

NOTICE

If the alarm has been triggered (direction

indicatorsflashingandhornsounding)itcan

be turned off by pressing one of the buttons

on the remote control or, if you are sitting in

the car, by turning the ignition to ON (see

below).

• It is possible to inadvertently deacti-

vate the car alarm and at the same

timeunlockthecar, if thebuttononthe

key is pressed by mistake when the

car is still within its range.

When the alarm is tripped, the lights and

horn come on for 3 minutes or until you

press one of the remote control buttons.

To start the alarm manually proceed as

follows:

Turns off lights and horn.

Unlocks car.

• When locking the car by remote

control in extremely cold weather, it is

advisable to check that the lock

system has operated properly. To do

so, check that the interior locking

buttons are all down.

Turns off lights and horn.

Car remains locked.

Turns off lights and horn.

Unlocks trunk.

• Press and hold the

button on the

If not, unlock and relock the car again.

remote control for more than 2 seconds,

or if you are sitting in the car...

Turns off lights and horn.

Turns on exterior and cabin light-

ing. Car remains locked.

• Press and hold the

button on

one of the front doors for more than

2 seconds.

To switch off the alarm:

If sitting in the car: Turn the remote

control to ON in the ignition switch

• Press one of the remote control buttons

or, if you are sitting in the car, the

buttons on one of the front doors.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Security

Overview of functions

Locking/arming Direction indicators flash once.

Unlocking/

disarming

Direction indicators flash twice.

Unlocking/

disarming trunk

lid

Direction indicators flash three times.

Alarm triggered Direction indicators flash for 5 min.

The horn sounds for 30-second intervals with

10-second breaks (max. 10 cycles) or until you

press one of the remote control buttons or turn

the remote control ON in the ignition switch.

Remote control Normal range: 5–16 yds. (5–15 metres).

In favorable conditions the range can be signifi-

cantly greater.

Remote control Normal life: approx. 4 years.

battery

Change the battery when the SID displays:

Remote control battery

low. Replace battery.

See Changing the key battery, page 56.

Some car alarm functions and indications can be reprogrammed.

Contact a Saab dealer for details of the possibilities and refer to

page 309.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Security

Quick guide, LED and Saab Information Display

(SID) messages

SID message

Reason/action

Activity

LED signal

Key not accepted.

Error when remote control

inserted into ignition switch.

Arming (delay period)

Alarm armed

Disarming

Illuminates for 11 s.

Flashes once every 3 s.

Extinguishes.

Off.

Contact Saab dealer.

Remote control battery

low. Replace battery.

Battery needs replacing.

See page 56.

Alarm not armed

2: standard key

Key No: 1

Check of the number of remote

controls programmed for your

car. See page 55.

A door, the hood or the tailgate is Flashes for 11 s then flashes

open or opened during the delay once every 3 s.

period.

Alarm has been triggered

since being armed.

The alarm has been tripped

since the car was last locked.

Car immobilized but not locked. Off.

Immobilizer failure.

Try starting again.

Contact Saab dealer.

Error when immobilizer code

checked.

Change of status of immobilizer Double-flashes for 3 s.

system, valid remote control

inserted or removed from ignition

switch.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

Advice on soft top

operation ___________

Rollover Pop-up Bars ___

Electric windows_______

Interior lighting ________

Operating the soft top__

Raising the soft top

manually ___________

Unlocking the trunk lid

manually ____________

SID warnings and

messages __________

Placing two golf bags

in the trunk __________

"Easy entry"__________

Head restraints _______

Safety belts, rear seat,

Convertible _________

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,

market specification, options or accessories).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

• Roof racks and ski holders must not be

mounted on the soft top.

• Onnoaccountshouldanythingbeputinto

the stowage space of the soft top (under

the soft top cover) since this could cause

an obstruction when the soft top is being

folded away.

• Do not place any objects on the covers

over the roll bars as this can hamper their

function.

• When operating the soft top, raise or fold

it fully until notified that operation is

Advice on soft top

operation

• Once you have raised the soft top and

before driving off, always check that the

softtopis properly engagedwith thewind-

shield rail.

• Once you have folded the soft top and

before driving off, check that the soft top

cover is locked.

• Do not operate the soft top in tempera-

tures below 23°F (–5°C).

• Note that certain automatic car washes

can damage the soft top. This applies to

car washes that use mechanical feelers

bearing against the body. Saab advises

against washing the Convertible in an

automatic car wash.

WARNING

• Never touch the hinges and struts of

the soft top nor the upper rail of the

windshield while operating the soft

top.

• Do not operate the soft top while there

are bystanders close to the car.

complete by the SID. Do not leave the soft

top partially open/closed. If the soft top is

left in an intermediate position it will

collapse progressively after 20 seconds

to prevent overloading the drive system.

• Washing the soft top, see page 277.

• Afterrainorwashingthecar,allowthesoft

top to dry completely before folding it.

Folding a wet or damp soft top can cause

water damage in the car and mildew to

form on the soft top.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

Read the "Advice on soft top operation"

sectiononpage 64beforeoperatingthesoft

top.

Operating the soft top

The soft top is operated with the switch on

the instrument panel. Hold the switch in the

desired position until the soft top is fully

folded or raised.

The completion of folding or raising the soft

top is indicated by a chime.

WARNING

• Donot touch thehinges or struts of the

soft top during opening due to the

pinch hazard.

• Keep children out of reach.

Error messages that can appear on the SID

are shown on page 73.

• Do not operate the soft top while there

are bystanders close to the car.

• Make sure that the soft top cover has

locked properly after folding the soft

top.

Switch for operating the soft top

a Raising

b Folding

• Check that the soft top engages prop-

erly with the upper edge of the wind-

shield after raising.

NOTICE

If you drive off while raising or folding the

soft top, operation is halted when

the speed of the car exceeds 20 mph

(30 km/h). This speed can be

programmed(0–20 mph/0–30 km/h).We

recommend that you contact a Saab

dealer. The movement of the car and

force of the wind can seriously damage

the components of the soft top system.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

Remote opening 3

You can fold the soft top when outside the

Opening

The following conditions must be fulfilled for

the soft top to be folded:

car by pressing and holding the

(unlock) button on the remote control. See

also page 129.

• Vehicle speed must not exceed 20 mph

(30 km/h).

• Battery voltage must exceed 10 V.

• Outside temperature must exceed 23°F

(–5°C).

• The trunk lid must be locked.

• There must be sufficient space in the

trunk for the soft top.

Folding

1 Starttheengineandlet itidle. Clearance

for soft top operation: height, min. 7.2 ft

(2.2 m); behind car, min. 2" (5 cm).

2 Press and hold the soft top button until

thesoft top is fullyfoldedand the soft top

cover raised. Completed folding is indi-

cated by a chime. If there is a malfunc-

tion a text message will be shown on the

SID. Refer to page 73.

Do not press any of the buttons on the

same section of the instrument panel as

the soft top switch while folding the soft

top. This will cause the soft top to stop

and then sink after about 20 seconds.

If you continue to hold the button after the

chime, all the windows will open after a brief

delay.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

1 Rear window raised. Soft top storage in

luggage compartment lowered.

3 Soft top folded.

4 The soft top cover is closed.

2 The soft top cover is opened.

a 7.2 ft (2.2 m)

b 2" (5 cm)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

securely to the upper edge of the wind-

shield.

If you hold the button pressed up after the

chime, all the windows will be closed after a

short delay.

Raising

The following conditions must be fulfilled for

raising the soft top:

• Vehicle speed must not exceed

20 mph (30 km/h).

• Battery voltage must exceed 10 V.

• The trunk lid must be locked.

Raising

1 Starttheengineandlet itidle. Clearance

for soft top operation: height, min. 7.2 ft

(2.2 m); behind car, min. 2" (5 cm).

2 Press and hold the soft top button until

thesoft topis fully raised andthesofttop

cover closed. Completed raising is indi-

cated by a chime. If there is a malfunc-

tion a text message will be shown on the

SID. Refer to page 73.

Do not press any of the buttons on the

same section of the instrument panel as

the soft top switch while raising the soft

top. This will cause the soft top to stop

and then sink after about 20 seconds.

All side windows are opened slightly to pro-

tect the seals when the soft top is raised.

Check that the hooks in the soft top hold it

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

1 The soft top cover is opened.

2 The soft top is raised.

3 The soft top cover is closed.

4 The rear window is lowered.

a 7.2 ft (2.2 m)

b 2" (5 cm

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

Raising the soft top

manually

WARNING

Only raise the soft top manually in an

emergency (e.g. due to an electrical

fault).

Do not touch the soft top button on the

instrumentpanelwhileclosingthesofttop

manually. This could cause personal

injury and damage the soft top mecha-

nism.

Wire catch for unlocking soft top cover

Do not fold the soft top having closed it

manually. This can damage the soft top

mechanism.

1 Find the lug wrench, Allen key and

screwdriver located under the luggage

compartment floor.

2 Remove the two covers from the side

trim in the trunk, one from either side.

If there are two of you, it is easiest if you

stand on either side of the car and perform

steps 3-6 and 9-10 together.

3 Unlock the soft top cover by pressing

forward thetwowire catches, one on the

left and one on right-hand side.

If the soft top has been folded mechanically

there will be a delay of 20 seconds before it

is possible to raise it manually (the pressure

must be released from the hydraulic sys-

tem).

If the car is without electrical power, the

trunk must be unlocked manually. Refer to

page 81.

Tools under luggage compartment floor

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

Soft top cover opened

Manual closing started

Soft top pulled towards windshield

7 Before raising the soft top, the two

4 Close the trunk lid fully as otherwise it

will obstruct the soft top cover.

5 Open the soft top cover, upward and

backward.

catches in the leading edge of the soft

top must be opened. Stand in the rear

seatandpryoffthecoverwiththescrew-

driver. Using the tool, turn clockwise to

open the catches.

Stand in the rear seat and raise the soft

top. Pull it towards the windshield. This

operation requires 7.2 ft (2.2 m) of verti-

cal clearance.

WARNING

• Do not touch the hinges and struts of

the soft top during raising.

6 Tip forward the front seat backrests.

• Keep your hands clear of the front

windshield rail.

• Pinch hazard may cause personal

injury.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

Soft top locked to windshield rail

Closing the soft top cover

Rear window locked to soft top cover

8 Sit in one of the front seats and lock the

softtoptothewindshieldrail.Usethelug

wrench and the Allen key. Turn roughly

1/4 turn counterclockwise. Check that

thesoft top is properly locked in place by

pressing up the front edge. The soft top

must not move upward.

9 Lift up the rear window fully and hold it

there. Close the soft top cover. It is not

possible to lock the soft top cover after

manual raising.

11 Now lock the rear window to the soft top

cover. Sit in the rear seat and insert the

tool (the same tool as used to lock the

soft top to the windshield rail) into the

hexagonal hole in the soft top mecha-

nism. Turn roughly 1/4 turn, counter-

clockwise on the right had side of the

soft top and clockwise on the left-hand

side. Look at the soft top cover when

locking the rear window. The rear

window must make a tight seal against

the soft top cover.

NOTICE

To avoid damaging the paintwork on the

soft top cover and the trunk lid, take care

when closing the soft top cover.

10 Press down the rear edge of the soft top

as far as possible towards the soft top

cover.

The soft top system must be checked and

rectified without delay. We recommend that

you contact a Saab dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

SID warnings and messages

The following messages associated with the soft top system and can be displayed on the SID together with a chime:

Cause

Suitable action

Soft top front not locked.

Try again.

Failure of the soft top to lock automatically to

the windshield.

• Move the car so that it is standing level if on

a steep slope.

• Press the soft top button to fold the soft top

slightly. Fold the soft top again.

Soft top power pack

overheated.

This message appears if the soft top is operated Wait 6 minutes to allow the hydraulic pump to

continuously for more than 3 minutes.

cool down.

Allow to cool.

Open trunk.

Move the object hindering soft top operation.

Move goods away from

top storage area.

Soft top may be

damaged if operated

at low temperature.

Displayed if the soft top is folded at temperatures

below 23°F (–5°C).

Only manual

operation possible.

Contact Saab dealer.

Soft top cover not locked.

Try again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

Battery low.

The voltage of the car battery is too low to allow

soft top operation.

Soft top obstructed.

Clear obstacles and

try again.

Open/close soft top

completely to open trunk.

Complete soft top operation.

Open/close soft top

Complete soft top operation.

Close the trunk lid.

completely before driving

Close trunk.

Driver seat unlocked.

The backrest is not locked.

Raise the backrest fully to locked position, see

page 75.

Passenger front seat

unlocked.

Raise the backrest fully to locked position, see

page 75.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

"Easy entry"

WARNING

• Always check that the backrest locks

properly when returned to normal

position.

• Check that the fore-and-aft position of

the seat is properly locked. The back-

rest and the entire belt-in seat must be

locked in position; otherwise the occu-

pant of the seat is at risk of injury

during braking or in the event of a

crash, especially if a rear-facing child

seat is fitted behind the backrest.

"Easy entry" function. Illustration shows an electrically adjustable seat 3

To facilitate getting in and out of the rear

seat, the front seats can be slid forward.

Manually adjusted passenger seats 3

Electrically adjustable front seats 3

1 Raise the handle by the head restraint

on the seat.

1 Raise the handle by the head restraint

on the seat.

2 Tip the backrest and slide the seat

forward.

Repositioning:

2 Tip the backrest forward.

3 The seat now moves to its foremost

position.

Repositioning:

1 Tip back the backrest.

2 Slide the seat back to the desired

position.

1 Tip the backrest back to its normal

position.

Make sure the backrest and seat are prop-

erly locked in position.

2 Raise and hold the handle until the seat

has returned to its previous position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

Head restraints

WARNING

• Adjust the head restraint so that the

head is optimally supported and the

center of the head restraint is at ear

height, thus reducing the likelihood of

neck injury in a crash.

• Raise the head restraints in the seats

that are occupied.

The front seats are equipped with Saab

ActiveHeadRestraints(SAHRs).Theseare

designed to reduce the risk of neck injury if

the car is hit from behind.

Front head restraint

Rear head restraint

The SAHR is a mechanical system, actu-

atedbybodyweight.Themechanismisbuilt

into the top of the backrest, where it is con-

nected to the head restraint.

The front and rear head restraints can be

raisedand lowered toa numberofpositions.

In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is

forced back against the backrest. This, in

turn, causes the mechanism to press the

headrestraint forwardandupward, thus lim-

iting the backward movement of the head.

• Raising: grasp the head restraint on both

sides and pull it straight up.

• Lowering: Press the head restraint

forward and downward.

The rear head restraints can be fully low-

ered to improve rearward vision when the

rear seats are unoccupied.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

Safety belts, rear seat,

Convertible

The two rear seats have three-point safety

belts with inertia reels.

Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and insert-

ing the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is

securely fastened.

Position the lap part low across the hips.

Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle

and pull the belt towards the shoulder to

tighten the lap belt part.

The belt must be as far inon the shoulder as

possible.

Press the red button on the belt buckle to

release the belt.

Safety belts, rear seat, Convertible

Refer to page 276 for how to check the func-

tion of the safety belts, cleaning, etc.

WARNING

• If cargo has to be placed on a seat, it

must be properly secured with the

safety belt. This reducestherisk ofthe

cargo being thrown about during hard

braking or a crash, which could cause

personal injury.

• Check that the belt is not twisted or

lying against sharp edges.

• Make sure you use the correct seat-

belt buckle.

For how to secure loads on the rear seat,

refer to page 17.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

Rollover Pop-up Bars

• Rollover Pop Up Bars deploy with

great force, and you could be injured if

your arm or other body part, or if an

object is covering the bars when they

deploy. Don't put anything on the

cover of the Rollover Pop Up Bars.

The path of the Rollover Pop Up Bars

must be kept clear.

The Rollover Pop Up Bars, which are

located behind each rear seat head

restraint, are designed to deploy in the

event of a crash or rollover.

WARNING

• The Rollover Pop Up Bars are

designed to deploy only once. If they

deploy, take your vehicle to a work-

shopimmediatelytohavetheRollover

Pop Up Bars repaired so that they

operate properly in the event of a

crash or rollover. We recommend that

you contact a Saab dealer.

You can be severely injured or killed in a

crash if you are not wearing your safety

belt - even if you have airbags and Roll-

over Pop Up Bars. Wearing your safety

belt during a crash helps reduce your

chance of hitting things inside the vehicle

or being ejected from it.

Rollover Pop-up Bars

• The Rollover Pop Up Bars have

powerful springs that rapidly extend

the bars in rollover crashes, as well as

in moderate to severe crashes in

which the airbags deploy. Rollover

Pop Up Bars are supplemental to the

safety belts. They are designed to

work with safety belts but do not

replace them.

NOTICE

To avoid therisk of damage tothe soft top

do not operated the soft top while the

bars are extended.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

To close

Soft top raised – The windows are operated

individually.

Electric windows

WARNING

Soft top folded – The button for the front

window closes both side windows.

Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-

ing the side windows. May cause serious

or fatal injuries!

Automatic closing of a front side

window: Raise the button all the way and

release it. The rear side window must be

fully closed. Pinch protection 3 is available

for the front side windows.

For further information on the electric win-

dows, refer to page 129.

• Always remove the remote control

from the ignition switch when you

leave the car to prevent personal

injury caused by the activation of the

electric windows, for example, due to

children playing.

Deactivating the passenger door

window button

Window switches

• The person operating the electric

window is responsible for ensuring

that no one, especially a child, has

their head, hands or fingers in the

window openings, before raising the

window.

With the

button on the driver’s door,

you can deactivate the window button on

the passenger door.

To open

Soft top raised – The windows open individ-

ually.

Soft top folded – The button for the front

window opens both side windows.

Automatic opening: Press the button all

the way down and release it. If the soft top

is folded, the rear side window is also low-

ered.

The illuminated switch will change color

from green to amber (deactivated).

• Do not stick any part of the body or the

head out through an open window

while the car is moving.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

Calibrating front electric

Interior lighting

windows with pinch protection 3

The interior lighting consists of a front roof

light, two front reading lights, footwell light-

ing and courtesy lighting in the doors. The

light switches are located in the roof con-

sole.

The window liftsshould becalibratedif auto-

matic closing does not work or if the battery

has been disconnected. The pinch protec-

tion will not work if the windows are not

calibrated.

Perform calibration as follows:

The cabin lighting comes on:

1 Make sure the soft top is raised.

2 Make sure the doors are closed.

3 Let the engine idle.

4 Press and hold the soft top button up

until a chime sounds.

During calibration, the four windows will

be raised and lowered several times.

Ifcalibrationfailstwiceinarow,havethecar

checked and rectified. We recommend that

you contact a Saab dealer.

• When a door is opened and the ignition is

OFF.

• When the remote control is removed from

the ignition switch.

Front interior lighting - Convertible

1 Left-hand reading light

2 Cabin light

The lighting goes out:

• When the car is locked.

3 Right-hand reading light

• When the ignition is turned on.

• Approx. 20 s after closing all doors.

The lights are dimmed out gradually.

If a door is left open with the ignition OFF,

the interior lighting goes out automatically

after 5 min so as not to drain the battery.

The interior lighting can be switched off

completely.

1 Open the driver’s door.

2 Turnoff the cabin lighting with the center

button, see illustration.

This is canceled when the ignition switch is

turned to position ON or when the car is

locked with the remote control.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

Glove box

The glove box lighting comes on when the

compartment is opened and goes out when

it is closed.

Unlocking the trunk lid

manually

If the trunk lid is not unlocked by the central

locking system, it can be unlocked

manually.

For changing bulbs, refer to page 243.

Sun visor

1 Takethetraditionalkeyoutoftheremote

control by pressing the emblem on the

reverse (see page 56).

2 Carefully prise off the round cover using

your nails, a credit card or similar so as

not to damage the paintwork.

3 Unlock the trunk lid using the traditional

key.

We recommend that you contact a Saab

dealer to have the central locking system

checked.

An illuminated vanity mirror is provided on

the inside of the sun visors. The lighting

comesonwhenthecoverisraisedandgoes

out when it is closed.

Trunk lighting

The trunk lighting comes on and goes out

when the trunk lid is opened and closed.

If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be

switched off automatically after 20 min to

prevent the battery from running flat.

Unlocking the trunk lid manually

For changing bulbs, refer to page 245.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9-3 Convertible

Spoiler on trunklid 3

WARNING

Placing two golf bags

in the trunk

There is sufficient space in the trunk of the

Convertible for two golf bags. Proceed as

follows.

Some models have a spoiler on the trunk-

lid. Avoid getting fingers and hands

trapped between the spoiler and rear

fender when closing the trunklid.

1 Start by inserting the narrow end of the

first bag to the right.

2 Lie down the bag. Turn the bag so that it

lies on its widest side and slide it

forward, in under the soft top storage

(see illustration).

3 Put in the second bag in the same way

as the first, but lie it on its narrow side

(see illustration).

Wind deflector 3

A wind deflector is available as an acces-

sory. Follow the fitting instructions supplied

with the wind deflector carefully.

Position of first golf bag

CargoWing 3

NOTICE

If play arises in any part of the

CargoWing, contact a workshop immedi-

ately to have this corrected. We recom-

mend that you contact a Saab dealer. If

such play is not eliminated, the

CargoWing may come loose while driv-

ing.

Position of second golf bag

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls

Warning and indicator

lights _______________

Instruments ___________

Information display,

main instrument panel_

Saab Information Display

(SID)________________

Switches _____________ 102

Wipers and washers ____ 106

Manual climate-control

system 3 ____________ 110

Automatic climate-

control system (ACC)__ 115

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,

market specification, options or accessories).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls

Main instrument panel (Arc panel shown)

Warning and indicator

lights

The warnings and indications that can be

shown depend on the engine variant and

equipment level.

Antilock braking warning

This warning light illuminates when a fault

arises in the antilock brake system.

The following message is shown on the

Saab Information Display (SID):

Antilock brake malfunction.

Contact Saab dealer.

The brake system will continue to function

but without ABS modulation.

U.S. shown, Canada similar

Main instrument panel

1 Tachometer

2 Speedometer

3 Turbo gauge

4 Fuel gauge

5 Engine temperature gauge

6 Information display

7 Trip meter reset button

Charge warning light

This light comes on when the battery is not

being charged by the alternator. If the light

comes on during driving, stop as soon as

possible and switch off the engine.

Check the drive belt, see page 229.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls

This light indicates a malfunction in the fuel

or ignition system. The car may still be

driven with care but the performance of the

engine will be somewhat diminished (see

page 164).

The following message is shown on the

Saab Information Display (SID):

Warning, oil pressure

(engine oil)

Engine malfunction

(CHECK ENGINE)

This light will come on if the engine oil pres-

sure is too low. If thewarning light flashes or

comes on while you are driving, stop imme-

diately in a safe place, switch off the engine

and check the oil level (see page 219).

WARNING

An illuminated “Engine malfunction

(CHECK ENGINE)” indicator light indi-

cates an engine-related problem. While

your car may be able to be driven with the

“Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”

indicator light illuminated (limp-home

mode), you are advised to have your car

serviced at an authorized Saab dealer as

soon as possible.

Engine malfunction.

Contact Saab dealer.

NOTICE

Never drive the car when the oil pressure

warning lamp is on. Low oil pressure can

cause serious engine damage.

The car should be checked immediately

at a Saab dealer to prevent more serious

faults from arising.

The following message is shown on the

Saab Information Display (SID):

Continued driving without this problem

being corrected might cause serious

further damage to your car and create

unsafe driving conditions. The operator

should be prepared to take action if such

unsafe conditions arise (e.g. brake

smoothly, engage neutral, stop in a suita-

ble place, switch off the engine, etc.)

Oil pressure low.

Make a safe stop.

Turn off engine.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls

The following message is shown on the

Saab Information Display (SID):

The brake system provides Electronic

Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distrib-

utes the brake pressure between the front

andrearwheels,insuchawayastoachieve

optimum braking performance irrespective

of the car’s load.

High beam Indicator

Brake fluid level low.

Make a safe stop.

Contact Saab dealer.

This light shows when the high beam is on

(see page 103).

Ifa fault arisesintheEBD function, the

WARNING

and lights will come on. Also, the

following message will appear on the Saab

Information Display (SID):

Front fog lights 3

• Never drive the car if these two lights

are on at the same time. Danger of

brake failure!

This light indicates when the front fog lights

are on (see page 104).

The front fog lights are switched off auto-

matically when the engine is switched off.

When the fog lights are next needed, they

will have to be switched on manually.

Brake malfunction.

Make a safe stop.

Contact Saab dealer.

• If the level of brake fluid in the reser-

voir isbelow theMINmark, thevehicle

should be transported on a recovery

vehicle.

Ifthis isthecase, drivecarefully andcontact

a workshop as soon as possible. We recom-

mend that you contact a Saab dealer. Refer

to Brake warning light on page 86, Antilock

braking warning on page 84 and ESP OFF

indicator on page 92.

• Have the brake system checked

immediately at a Saab dealer.

Brake warning light

For safety reasons, stop the car and check

the level of the brake fluid (see page 224).

This light should come on briefly when you

turntheignitionkeytoON. Ifitdoesn´tcome

on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn

you if there is a problem. This light indicates

when the brake fluid level is too low (see

page 224).

If the level is normal, depress the brake

pedal firmly two or three times. Now check

thelevelagain. Ifthelevelisstillnormal, you

may drive the car, with considerable cau-

tion, to the nearest workshop to have the

brake system checked. We recommend

that you contact a Saab dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls

This light will come on for about four sec-

onds when the ignition switch is turned to

the Start or Drive position.

Safetybelt reminder

Airbag warning light

This light reminds the driver to buckle up.

This light comes on if a potentially serious

fault has occurred in the airbag system.

Indicator, fuel

The following message is shown on the

Saab Information Display (SID):

Parking brake warning

light

This light comes on when there is less than

about 2.5 gallons (10 litre) of fuel left in the

tank.

Airbag malfunction.

Contact Saab dealer.

This light comes on when the parking brake

is applied (see page 187).

NOTICE

The parking brake is mechanical and oper-

ates on the rear wheels.

If the car runs out of fuel, air can be drawn

in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause

the catalytic converter to be damaged by

overheating.

WARNING

• If the airbag readiness light stays on

after you start your vehicle, it means

the airbag system may not be working

properly. One or more of the following

conditions may occur:

- Non-deployment of the airbags in the

event of a crash.

• Always apply the parking brake when

parking, see page 187.

• Always apply the parking brake

before removing the remote control.

• Do not apply the parking brake while

the car is moving.

- Deployment of the airbags without a

crash.

- Deployment of the airbags in crashes

less severe than intended.

• To help avoid injury to yourself or

others, have your vehicle serviced

right away if the airbag readiness light

stays on after you start your vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls

Headlight and parking

light indicator

This light indicates that the headlights or

parking lights are on.

Cruise control indicator

light

This light comes on when the system is

engaged.

Automatic tire pressure

monitoring

Autochecking of lights, main

instrument panel

The warning and indicator lights shown

above should come on when the ignition

switch is turned to ON. They should go out

after about 4 seconds once the engine has

started or after the fault-free self-diagnosis

of each system or function.

Instruments

This light comes on if the air pressure in one

or several of the tires drops (see page 254.

Tachometer

The tachometer displays the engine speed

in thousands of revolutions per minute.

A protective function (interruption of the fuel

supply) limits the engine speed within the

red zone.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls

Reset button

The reset button is positioned immediately

to the left of the speedometer.

• Ignition ON:

Press once – resets the trip meter.

• Ignition OFF:

Cars with manual transmission

Press once – enables you to read the

odometer and trip meter.

Cars with automatic transmission

Speedometer

(U.S. speedometer shown)

Odometer and trip meter

Cars sold in U.S.: The speedometer dis-

plays the speed of the car in miles per hour

(mph).

Cars sold in Canada: The speedometer

displays the speed of the car in kilometres

per hour (km/h).

The odometer records the distance trav-

elled in miles on U.S. vehicles and on Cana-

dian vehicles the distance indicated is in

kilometres, and the trip meter in miles and

tenths (kilometres and tenths of kilometres

on Canadian vehicles).

It receives information about vehicle speed

from the ABS’s wheel sensors.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls

NOTICE

If the needle, despite the above action,

enters the red zone, stop the car in a suit-

able place and allow the engine to idle. If

theneedlecontinuestorise, switchoffthe

engine.

Iftheneedlerepeatedlyenterstheredzone,

stop thecaras soonas it issafe to do soand

check the coolant level (see page 222).

WARNING

Temperature gauge

Turbo gauge

The turbo gauge indicates the air volume

used for combustion, which is equivalent to

the engine load.

Atlowloadsandwhentheengineisusedfor

braking, the needle will move within the

white zone.

Under certain barometric conditions the

needle may enter the first part of the red

zone without necessarily indicating that a

fault has arisen.

Neveropenthecapoftheexpansiontank

completely when the engine is hot, open

with care. The pressure in the cooling-

system can cause hot coolant and steam

to be released. Failure to heed this warn-

ing may result in personal injury.

The temperature gauge shows the temper-

ature of the coolant. The needle should be

in the middle of the scale when the engine

is at normal operating temperature.

If the needle goes into the red zone (which

can occur at high outside air temperatures

or under heavy engine loads), choose the

highest possible gear ratio and the lowest

possible engine speed, and avoid shifting

down.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls

If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone

and the engine at the same time loses

power, because the monitoring system is

limiting the boost pressure, you should

contact a Saab dealer as soon as possible.

Information display,

main instrument panel

Under the speedometer is a display. The

information shown here varies depending

on whether the car has a manual transmis-

sion or automatic transmission.

When the speed of the car exceeds

143 mph (230 km/h), acceleration is limited

by reducing the boost pressure. The pres-

sure gauge then moves towards the middle

of the white field, indicating a drop in engine

power and consequently the car’s speed.

Cars with manual transmission:

Fuel gauge

When less than about 2.5 gallons (10 litre)

of fuel is left in the tank, a warning light on

the main instrument panel comes on.

• The odometer reading is shown on the

left-hand side of the display.

• Various information and faults are

displayed in the center of the display.

• The trip meter reading is shown on the

right-hand side of the display.

Refueling, see page 167.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls

Cars with automatic

transmission:

ESP indicator

ESP OFF indicator

WARNING

This symbol lights up when the system is

operative.

Operation of the ESP indicates reduced

cohesion between the tires and the road,

and that extra care should be taken by the

driver.

• Theodometerandtripmeterreadingsare

shown on the left-hand side of the display.

• Various information and faults are

displayed in the center of the display.

• The selected gear position is shown on

the right-hand side of the display.

The system improves ride comfort and

safety during normal driving. It must

however not be regarded as a system

to enable the driver to maintain higher

speeds. The same precautions as

normal for safe cornering and driving

on slippery roads must be adopted (see

pages 183/ 185).

Information symbol.

Read information on SID

This symbol lights up when the system is

disengaged using the ESP button.

If there is a malfunction, the symbol cannot

be turned off by pressing the ESP button.

This symbol comes on when a message or

warning is displayed on the Saab Informa-

tion Display (SID).

The following message is shown on the

Saab Information Display (SID):

Gear selector indicator

(cars with automatic trans-

mission)

Stability control failure.

Contact Saab dealer.

Thecurrentgearpositionisdisplayedonthe

right-hand side of the information display.

When gears are selected manually, the

letter M (manual) and the selected gear are

displayed (see page 178).

If so, have the system checked at a Saab

dealer.

See also Profiler on page 124.

Temperature, air distribution, fan speed and recir-

culation will be controlled automatically.

In falling temperatures the A/C compressor is

switched off at approx. 32°F (0 °C).

In rising temperatures the A/C compressor is

switched on at approx. 40°F (+5 °C).

If, when starting the car, the outside air temperature

is between 32°F and 40°F (0 and +5 °C), the A/C

compressor is switched on.

Pressing AUTO once will cancelall previous manual

air distribution selections.

When the engine is started, the ACC system will be

in AUTO mode, provided that no air distribution set-

tings are programmed under Profiler (see

page 124).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

119

Instruments and controls

When the system is switched OFF:

• The fan and A/C compressor are switched off.

• The temperature control is set to 0 % heat.

• The current air distribution setting is retained.

• Recirculation can be selected.

To turn the system OFF, press and hold (or press

repeatedly) the button to reduce the fan speed until

the fan is switched off. Then release the button and

press it once more.

The A/C compressor will now be disengaged. To re-

engage the A/C, press one of the following buttons:

• The A/C compressor will be

switched on if it was previously

engaged, and the air distribution

and fan speed will switch to AUTO.

The rear window and door mirror heating can be

controlled manually or automatically (refer to

Profiler).

Switch off the rear window and door mirror heating

as soon as the glass is clear. The heating will be

turned off automatically after 12 minutes.

Refrain from placing sharp objects on the parcel

shelf, to avoid damaging the heating element.

• Higher fan speed

The A/C compressor will be

switched on if it was previously

engaged, the air distribution will return to its previ-

ous setting and fan speed will increase.

• Defroster

The A/C compressor will be

switched on if it was previously

disengaged, the air distribution will switch to

Defroster and the fan speed will increase (6 bars

on the display out of a maximum of 8).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 120

Air distribution

Recirculation is controlled manually.

Recirculation is not selected when the engine is

started (fresh air mode).

When defroster is chosen, all the front windows are

demisted:

• High fan speed

• The air is directed to the defroster vents

• Normal temperature control

• Recirculation OFF

• Rear window and door mirror heating ON.

The system will remain in defroster mode until the

Press

to decrease or increase the fan

speed. This sets the fan speed (fan speed shownon

display).

Refer also to Profiler regarding the possibility to

increase/decrease the automatic fan speed.

button is pressed.

The following three buttons for air distribution can be selected indi-

vidually or in combination. Press the button or selection of buttons

to produce the airflow you desire. Pressing the same button twice

will return the system to AUTO. You can also select automatic air

distribution by pressing the AUTO button.

Initial air distribution to take effect on starting the engine can be set

under Profiler (see page 124).

Airflow to windshield vents.

Airflow to facia air vents.

Airflow to floor vents.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

121

Instruments and controls

Shown below are several examples of air distribution.

Floor, front and rear

Windshield

Panel

Windshield – floor (front and rear)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 122

Formation of ice and mist in extreme weather

conditions

It is only in the most extreme conditions that icing and misting of

window glass are likely to be a problem, such as in torrential rain or

severecoldcoupledwithhighrelativehumidity,orwhenpassengers

are perspiring heavily or wearing wet clothes. The following mea-

sures are recommended if such problems should occur:

1 Select

and set the temperature to 70°F (21°C)

2 Select

. If this is not enough...

3 Increase the fan speed. If this is not enough...

4 Select a higher temperature.

Panel – floor (front and rear)

Windshield – panel – floor (front and rear)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 123

Calibration

Electric heating, front

seats 3

Calibration is performed automatically

everyfifthtimethecaris startedafterhaving

been switched off for more than 2 hours or

if the battery has been disconnected.

Theseatcushionsandbackrestsofthefront

seats are heated.

Heating is thermostatically controlled.

Heating is controlled manually but can also

be automatic. Refer to Profiler on page 124.

Threeheatinglevelsareavailable. Pressing

thebuttononcewillturntheheatingonatfull

power. Pressing the button a total of 4 times

will turn the heating off.

Programming

A number of functions can be customized

under Profiler (see page 124). Further cus-

tomizationscanbemadeataworkshop.We

recommend that you contact a Saab dealer.

Tips

(before contacting a workshop. We recom-

mend that you contact a Saab dealer)

•

= full.

= medium.

= low.

• If you feel that the ACC system is not func-

tioning satisfactorily, select "Default

Settings" under Profiler (see page 124.

• To prevent the smell of washer fluid from

entering the car, recirculation can be acti-

vated automatically while the windshield

is washed. The recirculation symbol will

however not light up. This function is

optional; contact a workshop. We recom-

mendthatyoucontactaSaabdealer.This

automatic recirculation is the factory

default setting as long as the system is

working in full "AUTO" model with no

customized settings.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

124

Instruments and controls

ACC- Convertible

Profiler

Whenthesoft topisfolded, the ACCsystem

switches to manual temperature control.

There are eleven temperature settings: 0–

10.

Some of the functions of the ACC system

can be customized.

1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to

Profiler.

2 Select Climate System using the

INFO dial.

The system adjusts itself as follows:

• AUTO goes out.

• Heating, airdistributionandfanspeedare

not affected.

• Recirculation and rear window heating

are cut out.

• The A/C compressor is switched off (man-

ual activation is possible by pressing the

AC button).

3 Press in the INFO dial.

ACC display when soft top folded

4 Select Rear Defroster, Heated Seats,

FanSettings,AirDistribution,A/CMode,

Dual/Single Zone or Default Settings by

turning the dial.

5 Confirm this selection by pressing the

INFO dial.

Once you have adjusted the ACC system

settings under Profiler, CUSTOMIZE will

appear on the ACC display.

All manual selections are possible with the

exception of rear window heating.

When the soft top is raised, the system

reverts to the AUTO mode and the previous

set temperature.

Note: When the soft top or all the windows

are open in a hot, humid climate, turning the

air conditioning on manually can cause con-

densation to form on cold surfaces, such as

the air ducts.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 125

Heated Seats

A/C Mode

Climate System

Rear Defroster

Auto

Auto:

Auto

The front seat heating is controlled

automatically.

A/C off

Select the level by repeatedly

pressing the appropriate button on

the ACC panel: 2 arrows on symbol

= standard; 3 arrows = high; 1 arrow

= low. The selected heating setting

is saved when the engine is

switched off. Note: The symbol on

the ACC panel goes out if the heat-

ing is turned off automatically by the

system.

Dual/Single Zone

Dual zone

Single zone

Default Settings

Are you sure?

Yes No

Manual

Heated Seats

Auto

Manual

Fan Settings

High speed

Medium speed

Low speed

Air Distribution

Auto

Manual:

Explanation of how the ACC system can be

customized under Profiler.

See Electric heating, front seats 3

on page 123.

This is one of the Default Settings.

Rear Defroster

Auto:

The rear window and door mirror

heating is controlled automatically.

This is one of the Default Settings.

Manual

Windshield

Panel

Manual:

The rear window and door mirror

heating is switched on with

the button on ACC panel.

Floor

Convertible:The rear window heating can-

not be turned on when the soft top is folded.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

126

Instruments and controls

Fan Settings

Dual/Single Zone

High speed:

A/C Mode

Dual zone:

This selection give a slightly higher

Auto:

Individual temperature setting for

fan speed than Medium speed

though with continued automatic

regulation.

each zone (see page 116). The sys-

tem saves the settings when the

engine is switched off. This is one of

the Default Settings.

Automatic engagement and disen-

gagement of the A/C. This is one of

the Default Settings.

Medium speed:

A/C off:

Single zone:

Normalautomaticfanspeed. This is

one of the Default Settings.

Low speed:

A/C compressor OFF (see also

page 118). The A/C compressor

can be activated temporarily by

pressing the AC or AUTO button

while on the road and if the outside

temperature is above 41°F (+5°C).

The A/C will be off the next time the

engine is started, if the engine has

been switched off for more than

2 hours.

Common temperature setting when

the engine is started. If the temper-

aturesettingforthepassengerzone

ischanged, thesystemwillswitchto

Dual zone control. Single zone con-

trol will return the next time the

This selection give a slightly lower

fan speed than Medium speed

though with continued automatic

regulation.

engine is started having been

switched off for more than 2 hours.

Convertible: Fan speed is not regulated

automatically when the soft top is open.

Air Distribution

Convertible: The A/C compressor is

switched off when the soft top is folded

down.

Further customizations to this function can

be made at a workshop. We recommend

taht you contact a Saab dealer.

Auto:

The ACC system adapts air tem-

perature and distribution to the pre-

vailing conditions. This is one of the

Default Settings.

• The A/C compressor can be on even

when the soft top is folded down.

• The A/C compressor can be set to

operate as when the soft top was last

folded down.

Manual:

Windshield:

The ACC system directs almost

all air to the windshield.

Panel:

The ACC system directs almost

all air to air vents in the fascia.

Floor:

The ACC system directs almost

all air to the floor.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interior equipment 127

Interior equipment

Steering wheel

adjustment __________ 128

Electric windows_______ 129

Rearview mirrors_______ 132

Sunroof 3 _____________ 138

Interior lighting ________ 141

Cup holder 3 __________ 142

Power Outlet 3_________ 144

Storage compartments__ 144

Trunk ________________ 146

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,

market specification, options or accessories).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

128

Interior equipment

Steering wheel

adjustment

WARNING

Only adjust the steering wheel while the

car is stationary so that you are not

distracted from the traffic.

The height and reach of the steering wheel

can be adjusted.

There is a release lever under the steering

column.

Lever for steering wheel adjustment

Horn signal

Activate the horn by pressing one of the

three areas shown above on the steering

wheel pad.

1 Pull down the lever to release the steer-

ing wheel.

2 Adjust the position of the steering wheel.

3 Raise the lever to the locked position to

lock the steering wheel in position.

When returning the release lever to its

locked position, you may need to adjust the

position of the steering wheel slightly to

allow the lock mechanism to engage cor-

rectly.

Steering wheel lock, see page 162.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interior equipment 129

Electric windows

WARNING

Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-

ing the side windows. May cause serious

or fatal injuries!

• Always remove the remote control

from the ignition switch when you

leave the car. This will prevent

personal injury caused by the activa-

tion of the electric windows, for exam-

ple, due to children playing.

Window switches

Window switch in rear door

• The person operating the electric

window is responsible for ensuring

that no one, especially a child, has

their head, hands or fingers in the

window openings, before raising the

window.

Windows having the automatic closingfunc-

tion (option) can be operated as long as the

car is unlocked and until 20 minutes has

passed since the remote control was

removed from the ignition switch.

Comfort opening 3

Comfort opening is the remote opening of

windows and the sunroof.

Press and hold the unlocking button on the

remote control until the windows and

optional sunroof start to open (approx. 2 s).

During comfort opening of the windows,

sunroof (option) and soft top, the range is

reduced by approximately half.

Convertible: For the remote opening of the

soft top, refer to page 66.

• Do not stick any part of the body or the

head out through an open window

while the car is moving.

To open

Press down the front edge of the button one

step.

The window will stop when it is fully open or

when the button is released.

Automatic opening: Press the button all

The electric windows are operated by

means of switches in the door armrests.

For theelectricwindowstowork, theremote

control must be in the ON position in the

ignition switch.

the way down and release it.

At the end of a journey and having removed

the remote control, you can still operate the

windows, so long as neither of the front

doors has been opened.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

130

Interior equipment

To close

Pinch protection 3

On certain model variants, the front electric

windows are equipped with pinch protec-

tion. This is activated if something gets

trappedbetweenthewindowpaneanddoor

frame when the window is closed. The

window will stop and lower slightly.

WARNING

Take care when closing a window to

ensure that no one gets caught.

Temporary overriding the pinch protec-

tion

Raise the front edge of the button one step.

The window will stop when it is fully closed

or when the button is released.

Automatic closing 3 : Raise the button all

the way and release it. If the window does

not close automatically, refer to Calibration

on page 131.

WARNING

Button for temporary deactivation of rear

door window switches and temporary

override of window pinch protection

Make sure nothing obstructs the window

when it is closed without pinch protection.

If dirt, ice or similar create so much resis-

tance that the pinch protection cuts in (the

window cannot be closed), the pinch protec-

tion can be temporarily disengaged and the

window closed.

1 Make sure the ignition is ON.

2 Press and hold the

button on the

driver’s door while operating the window

in question.

3 Close the window in question.

The pinch protection will be active the next

time a window is operated.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interior equipment 131

Calibration is performed as follows:

1 Close the doors.

Calibration

Deactivating the rear window

switches

2 The car must be running at idling speed.

The battery charger must not be

connected to the car’s battery during

calibration.

3 Open the window fully, the button must

be kept depressed the whole time.

WARNING

The

in the driver’s door deactivates the

window switches in the rear doors.

The pinch protection will not be engaged

after a power break until the electric

windows have been calibrated.

The illuminated switch will change color

from green to orange (deactivated).

4 Close the window fully, the button must

be kept raised the whole time and for

approx. 1 second after the window has

closed.

5 Open the window fully, the button must

be kept depressed the whole time and

for approx. 1 second after the window

has fully opened.

The front electric windows should be cali-

brated if automatic closing does not work or

if the battery has been disconnected. The

pinch protection 3 will not work if the win-

dows are not calibrated.

6 Close the window fully, and keep the

button raised until the calibration is

confirmed with a "chime".

Repeat steps 3-6 for the windows which

require calibration.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

132

Interior equipment

Rearview mirrors

Door mirrors

To adjust

The door mirrors are electrically adjustable

and heated. The controls for adjusting the

mirrors are on the driver’s door:

1 Select a door mirror with the upper

button.

2 Adjust the mirror using the touch pad.

The mirror glass can also be adjusted man-

ually by gently pressing the glass in the

desired direction.

Themirrorheatingisturnedontogetherwith

the rear window heating.

Retracting a door mirror

1 Selection of mirror

2 Touch pad for adjustment

3 Reversing position 3

If the car has an electrically adjustable

driver’s seat with memory, the mirror

settings are stored in the memory (see

page 20).

Manual retraction

Reversing position 3

On certain model variants, the passenger-

side mirror glass can be angled down to

The door mirrors are designed to fold back

if knocked. The mirrors can also be

retractedmanually.Thiscanbeusefulwhen

parking in tight spaces, such as on the car

deckofaferry.Remembertoreturnthedoor

mirrors to their normal positions before

driving off.

facilitate reversing. Press the

button

shown in the illustration. This is located

under the touch pad. Return the mirror to its

normal position by pressing the button

again. The mirror will also return to its

normal position if you drive forward approx-

imately 22 yds. (20 meters).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interior equipment 133

Interior rearview mirror with

autodimming 3

The system is activated when the forward-

facing sensor detects that it is dark outside

and the rear-facing sensor detects, for

example, if the car following has not

dimmed its headlights. The rearview mirror

is then darkened to prevent the strong light

source from dazzling the driver. This dark-

ening is stepless.

The mirror returns to its normal state when

the strong light source diminishes.

The autodimming function can be turned

OFFwiththeswitchontheloweredgeofthe

rear-view mirror.

Mirror position lever

1 Normal position

Mirror with autodimming

1 Forward-facing sensor

2 Autodimming ON/OFF

3 Rear-facing sensor

2 Antidazzle position

NOTE!

Towing a trailer can cause the system to

malfunction, as the rear-facing sensor may

shaded by the trailer.

Interior rearview mirror

The interior rearview mirror is of the auto-

dimming type and can be deflected with the

leveronitsunderside. Certainvariantshave

an autodimming rearview mirror.

The lever should be in the normal position

when you adjust the mirror.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

134

Interior equipment

Preparations for first-time programming

Interior rearview mirror with

garage opener, autodimming

function and compass 3

Before programming the garage opener for

the first time, you must delete any factory

codes.

Press and hold the two outer buttons until

the indicator light begins to flash-after

20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do not

holdforlongerthat 30 seconds. Thegarage

opener is now in the train(orlearning)mode

and can be programmed at any time begin-

ning with "Programming" - step 2.

WARNING

Makesurethat peopleandobjectsareout

of the way of moving door or gate to

prevent potential harm or damage.

When programming the garage opener,

you may be operating a garage door or

gate operator. Therefore it is advised to

park outside of the garage.

Programming

Thegarageopenercanrecordandstorethe

frequencies of three different remote con-

trols.

The battery in the remote control should be

fairly new for programming to work well.

Do not repeat "Programming" - step two

to train additional devices to a second or

third button. Begin with "Programming" -

step three.

Buttons for garage opener, autodimming

and compass

Do not use the garage opener with any

garage door opener that lacks the safety

stop and reverse feature as required by

federal safety standards. (This includes

any garage door opener model manufac-

tured before April 1, 1982.). A garage

door opener which cannot detect an

object, signaling the door to stop and

reverse, does not meet current federal

safety standards. Using a garage door

opener without these features increases

risk of serious injury or death.

1–3 Garage opener

4 LED

5 Autodimming/compass ON/OFF

6 Compass bearing

1 Turn the ignition ON.

Retain your original garage door opener

(transmitter) for future programming proce-

dures (i.e., new vehicle purchase). It is also

suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle,

the programmed garage opener buttons be

erased for security purposes, see

page 136.

2 Press and hold the two outer buttons

(buttons one and three) - releasing only

when the indicator light begins to flash

(after 20 seconds). Do not hold the

buttons for longer than 30 seconds and

do not repeat step two to program a

second and/or third hand-held transmit-

ter to the remaining two buttons.

3 Position the endof your hand-held trans-

mitter 1-3 inches (5-14 cm) away from

the button you wish to program while

keeping the indicator light in view.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interior equipment 135

4 The transmitter should face the mirror

from below or left side of the mirror.

5 Simultaneously press and hold both the

chosen and hand-held transmitter

buttons. Do not release the buttons

until step 5 has been completed.

Note: Some gate operators and garage

door openers may require you to replace

this Programming Step 4 with procedures

noted in the "Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-

gramming" section.

6 After the indicator light changes from a

slow to a rapidly blinking light, release

both the mirror and hand-held transmit-

ter buttons.

antenna wire is attached to the motor-

head unit.

9 Firmly press and release the "learn" or

"smart" button. (The name and color of

the button may vary by manufacturer.)

Note: There are 30 seconds in which to ini-

tiate step nine.

10Return to the vehicle and firmly press,

hold for two seconds and release the

programmed button. Repeat the

Gate Operator / Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit)

after several seconds of transmission -

which may not be long enough for the

garage opener to pick up the signal during

programming. Similar to this Canadian law,

some U.S. gate operators are designed to

"time-out" in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-

culties programming a gate operator by

using the "Programming" procedures

(regardless of where you live), replace

"Programming " step 4 with the following:

"press/hold/release" sequence a

second time, and, depending on the

brand of the garage door opener (or

other rolling code equipped device),

repeat this sequence a third time to

complete the programming process.

The garage opener should now activate

your rolling code equipped device.

Note: Ifprogrammingagaragedooropener

or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the

device during the "cycling" process to pre-

vent possible overheating.

7 Press and hold the just-trained button

and observe the indicator light.

If the indicator light stays on

constantly,programmingiscomplete

and your device should activate when

the button is pressed and released.

Note: To program the remaining two but-

tons, begin with "Programming" - step

three. Do not repeat step two.

4 Continue to press and hold the button

while you press and release - every two

seconds ("cycle") your hand-held transmit-

ter until the frequency signal has success-

fully been accepted by the garage opener.

(The indicator light willflash slowly and then

rapidly.)

Note: To program the remaining two but-

tons, begin with "Programming" - step

three. Do not repeat step two.

If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two

seconds and then turns to a constant

light continue with "Programming"

steps 7-9 to complete the programming of

a rolling code equipped device (most com-

monly a garage door opener).

Proceed with "Programming" step five to

complete.

NOTICE

Switch off the power supply to the garage

door or gate (or park the car beyond the

range of the remote control) while

programming using the "cycling" method

to prevent damaging the electrical motor.

8 At the garage door opener receiver

(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate

the "learn" or "smart" button. This can

usually be found where the hanging

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

136

Interior equipment

Reprogramming a single button

Opening a garage door

To program a device to the garage opener

using a button previously trained, follow

these steps:

To operate, simply press and release the

programmed button. Activation will now

occurforthetraineddevice(i.e.garagedoor

opener, gate operator, security system,

entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.).

For convenience, the hand-held transmitter

of the device may also be used at any time.

1 Press and hold the desired button. DO

NOT release the button.

2 Theindicatorlightwillbegintoflashafter

20 seconds. Without releasing the

button, proceed with "Programming" -

step 3.

Erasing the three buttons

To erase programming from the three but-

tons (individual buttons cannot be erased

but can be "reprogrammed" as outlined

below), follow the step noted:

Buttons for garage opener, autodimming

and compass

1–3 Garage opener

4 LED

5 Autodimming/compass ON/OFF

6 Compass bearing

• Press and hold the two outer buttons until

the indicator light begins to flash-after

20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do

not hold for longer that 30 seconds. The

garage opener is now in the train (or

learning) mode and can be programmed

atanytimebeginningwith"Programming"

- step 3.

Autodimming

Pressbutton5brieflytoswitchautodimming

onoroff.Whenautodimmingisswitchedon,

a 1 is displayed briefly in the compass win-

dow. A 0 indicates that autodimming is

switchedoff. Seepage 133foradescription

of operation.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interior equipment 137

Compass

The compass is built into the rearview mir-

ror.Thecompassbearingisdisplayedinthe

top right-hand corner of the mirror and is

updated every other second. The compass

displays the car’s direction of travel: N, NE,

E, etc.

Switch the compass display on and off by

pressing button 5 for 3 seconds, see illus-

tration on page 136.

Changing zones

Theearth’smagneticfieldvariesdepending

on one’s position on the globe. If you drive

your car from one magnetic zone to another

thecompasssettingwillneedtobechanged

to ensure a correct bearing.

Compass zones in USA

Compass zones in Canada

Calibration

Calibration is performed automatically

during travel.

If, for any reason, a manual calibration is

needed perform as follows:

1 Study the illustrations to determine the

correct zone.

2 Press and hold button 5 until "ZONE" is

shown in the display on the mirror (6 s).

The zone number is now also shown.

3 Press button 5 repeatedly to change the

zone number. There are 15 zones from

which to choose. Once the correct zone

is selected, release the button and wait

4 seconds. The compass will now

display the bearing.

1 Press and hold button 5 until "CAL" and

the compass bearing are displayed

(approx. 9 s).

2 Drive in circles (max. 5 mph/8 km/h) or

drive as normal until "CAL" is no longer

displayed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

138

Interior equipment

Sunroof 3

WARNING

Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-

ing the electric sunroof. Risk of serious or

fatal injuries!

• Always remove the remote control

from the ignition switch when you

leave the car. This will prevent

personal injury caused by the activa-

tion of the electric sunroof, for exam-

ple, due to children playing.

Sunroof control

3 Manually controlled closing

4 Automatic closing

1 Manually controlled opening

2 Automatic opening

• The person operating the electric

sunroof is responsible for ensuring

that no one, especially a child, has

their head, hands or fingers in the

opening, before closing the sunroof.

5 Ventilation position

Sunroof without automatic opening

To open

Manually controlled opening

Slide the control rearward to position 1 (see

illustration). The sunroof will stop when you

release the control or once it is fully open.

• Do not stick any part of the body or the

head out through an open window

while the car is moving.

Slidethecontrolrearwardtoitsfirstposition.

The sunroof will halt when you release the

control. If you do not release the control, the

sunroof will open to the comfort position. To

openthesunrooffurther, releasethecontrol

and then once again press it rearward.

The sunroof isoperated bythe control in the

roof console. For the sunroof to work, the

remote control must be in the ON position in

the ignition switch.

Automatic opening

If the car is equipped with windows having

the automatic closing function, the sunroof

canbeopenedandclosedsolongasthecar

is unlocked until 20 minutes has passed

since the remote control was removed from

the ignition switch.

Slide the control rearward to the second

position and release it. The sunroof will

open to the comfort position. To open the

sunroof further, slide the control rearward a

second time.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interior equipment 139

Ventilation position (rear edge of

sunroof open)

• To open – press in the control.

• To close – slide the control forward to the

second position.

It is also possible to select the ventilation

position when the sunroof is open by press-

inginthecontrol. Thesunroofwillthenclose

automatically. Press the control once

more to open the sunroof to its ventilation

position.

If you wish to open the sunroof fully from

the ventilation position, you must first close

it (slide the control forward). You can then

slide the control rearward to open the sun-

roof.

To close

Comfort opening 3

Comfort opening is the remote opening of

windows and the sunroof.

Press and hold the unlocking button on the

remote control until the windows and

optional sunroof start to open (approx. 2 s).

During comfort opening of the windows,

sunroof (option) and soft top, the range is

reduced by approximately half.

If the sunroof is in the ventilation position, it

will not open.

WARNING

Exercise great care when closing the

sunroof to ensure that nothing gets

trapped.

Manually controlled closing

Slide the control forward to its first position.

The sunroof will halt when you release the

control.

Convertible: For the remote opening of the

soft top, refer to page 66.

Automatic closing 3

Slide the control forward to its second posi-

tion and release it. The sunroof will close

fully.

The sunroof incorporates an interior, man-

ual, sliding sun blind.

The sunroof pinch protection halts closing

and opens the sunroof slightly if something

obstructs closing.

Sunroof without automatic closing 3

• To open – press the control up.

• To close – slide the control forward to

position 3.

Sunroof without automatic closing 3

Slide the control forward to position 3 (see

illustration). The sunroof will stop when you

release the control or once it is fully closed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

140

Interior equipment

Pinch protection 3

WARNING

Make sure nothing obstructs the sunroof

when it is closed without pinch protection.

The sunroof is equipped with pinch protec-

tion. This is activated if something gets

trapped when the sunroof is being closed.

The sunroof will stop and open slightly.

Temporary overriding the pinch protec-

tion

If dirt, ice or similar create so much resis-

tance that the pinch protection cuts in (sun-

roof cannot be closed), the pinch protection

can be temporarily disengaged.

Button for overriding the sunroof pinch

protection

Emergency operation of the

sunroof

In an emergency, such as if there is an elec-

trical failure, the sunroof can be operated

with a screwdriver.

Remove thelens from theroof console. Use

a screwdriver to press in the pin in the slot

in the center of the motor shaft and turn the

screwdriver.

1 Make sure the ignition is ON.

2 Press and hold the

button on the

driver’s door whileoperating the window

in question.

3 Close the sunroof with the button on the

roof console.

Turn clockwise to close the sunroof when in

ventilation position.

The pinch protection will be operative the

next time the sunroof is operated.

Turn counter-clockwise to close when in

open position.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interior equipment 141

Rear lighting

1 Reading lights

2 Roof light

1 Interior lighting always off

2 Interior lighting controlled by the doors

3 Interior lighting on continuously

interior lighting will be switched off automat-

ically after 20 minutes to save the battery.

When the switch is in the mid-position(door-

activated), the interior lighting will come on:

Interior lighting

The glovebox lightingis switched on andoff

automatically when the glove box is opened

and closed.

• When the car is unlocked.

• When a door is opened and the ignition is

OFF.

• When the remote control is removed from

the ignition switch.

Theinteriorlightingconsistsofonefrontand

one rear roof light, floor lighting, and cour-

tesy lights in the doors (certain variants

only). The light switch for the interiorlighting

is located on the roof console by the rear-

view mirror.

The lighting goes out:

• When the car is locked.

• When the ignition is turned on.

• Approx. 20 s after closing all doors.

The lights are dimmed out gradually.

If a door is left open and the light switch is in

position 2 or 3 and the ignition is OFF, the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

142

Interior equipment

Trunk lighting

The trunk lighting is switched on and off

when the trunk lid is opened and closed.

Cup holder 3

WARNING

If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be

switched off automatically after 20 minutes

to prevent the battery from running flat.

• The cup holder should not be used to

hold cups made of china or glass as

these can cause personal injury in the

event of a crash.

• Use only paper mugs, plastic bottles

or aluminium cans.

• Avoid spillage, particularly of hot

drinks.

Sun visor with vanity mirror

NOTICE

Sun visor

Take care not to spill any liquid on the

audio system , the ignition switch or the

like when using the cup holders. Soft

drinks in particular can cause malfunc-

tions.

Illuminated vanity mirrors are provided on

the sun visors. The lighting comes on when

the cover is raised.

Cup holders are provided in the fascia, in

the center console compartment between

the front seats and rear seat cushion (Sport

Sedan and SportCombi). The cup holder

between the seats can be raised if you wish

to use the compartment for storage.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interior equipment 143

Cup holder in fascia

Cup holder in center console compart-

ment between front seats 3

Cup holder in rear seat cushion 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

144

Interior equipment

Power Outlet 3

Storage compartments

You can use the electrical socket in the stor-

age compartment under the armrest

WARNING

between the front seats to charge a mobile

phone, for example. There is a recess on

each side of the compartment which will

accept a lead so that you can close the lid

without damaging the charger lead.

The glove box must be closed while trav-

elling. An open glove box door could

cause personal injury in the event of a

crash.

WARNING

There are additional storage compartments

below the front ashtray and in the doors.

The maximum output of the cigarette

lighter socket is 240 W (20 A). The rating

ofthesocketinthecompartmentbetween

the seats is the same. Overloading can

result in melting or even fire.

Open the glove box with the button on the

left of the moulding.

Convertible has lockable glove box. Use

the traditionally key, see page 56.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interior equipment 145

Sliding cover in glove box to admit cold

air 3 .

Card holder

Storage compartment between front seats

This allows the storage of chocolate dur-

ing hot weather for example.

Storage pocket on front edge of seats 3

Storage pocket on back of seats 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

146

Interior equipment

Trunk

Folding down the rear seat, Sport Sedan

Convertible: The rear seat cannot be folded.

WARNING

• Never drive the car if the backrest is not correctly locked into

position as this increases the risk of personal injury in the

event of heavy braking or a crash.

• Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During

sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and trunk

can climb to 160–180°F (70–80°C). Small children are very

susceptible to heat stroke.

• Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.

• Neverplaceheavyobjectsontheparcelshelf.Thereisalways

a danger of loose objects being thrown forward and causing

injury if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a

crash. See also page 204.

• When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is

locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since the

center safety belt is mounted in the backrest.

• When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is

locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since other-

wise objects in the trunk could force their way into the cabin

during heavy breaking or a crash.

• Adjust the head restraints for the rear seats to be occupied to

a suitable height before riding in the car.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interior equipment 147

For greater flexibility, the rear seat is split so that the narrow and

the wide part can be folded down separately.

Nexttothehingesinthetrunkarehandlesforunlockingtherearseat

backrests.

The operation is easier if the front seats are not too far back and

the rear seat head restraints are fully lowered.

1 Unlock the backrest by pulling the appropriate handle in the

trunk.

2 Fold the backrest forward.

Note: When returning the backrest to its upright position, make

sure that it locks properly in place and that the safety belt does

not get caught.

If the left-hand backrest is not properly locked in position, the follow-

ingmessageisdisplayedontheSID(equivalentmessagedisplayed

for right-hand backrest):

Rear left seat backrest

unlocked.

Trunk Release Handle, see page 149.

Emergency opening of the narrow backrest, Sport Sedan, see

page 150.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

148

Interior equipment

Load-through hatch, Sport Sedan

Convertible: There is no load-through hatch.

WARNING

• Always secure the load firmly, for example using the middle

safety belt. This reduces the danger of personal injury result-

ing from the displacement of the load on hard braking or in the

event of a crash.

• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its

handling characteristics (see page 294).

A load-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest to

enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.

Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and

apply the parking brake. This avoids the danger of the car moving

off if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into gear.

• Fold down the armrest and open the hatch by lifting the handle.

Thereisalockontherearsideofthehatch. Usethistolockorunlock

the hatch.

To lock: Open the hatch and lock the lock. Close the hatch. The

hatch is now locked.

To unlock: Fold down the wide section of the backrest and unlock

the lock. Alternatively, you can unlock the hatch from the trunk.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interior equipment 149

WARNING

• Lay heavy bags on the floor. Place

smaller and lighter bags on top.

• Secure heavy and bulky items using

the lashing eyes provided in the trunk.

This will avert the danger of luggage

flying around if the car should brake

suddenly or be involved in a crash.

• Secure small items if the backrest is

folded down. Small items can also be

thrown around inside the car and

cause personal injury.

Trunk Release Handle

Tie down eyes in the trunk

• The elastic cargo net 3 is only

designedforlightobjectsthataretobe

kept in place while driving

Trunk Release Handle

Tie down eyes, Sport Sedan

There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release

handle located inside the trunk on the latch.

This handle will glow following exposure to

light. Pull the release handle down to open

the trunk from inside.

There are tie down eyes in the trunk that

should be used to secure loads. In general,

loads should be placed as far forward and

as low down as possible in the trunk.

• Elasticcargonet 3 :WARNING.Avoid

eye injury. DO NOT overstretch.

ALWAYS keep face and body out of

recoil path. DO NOT use when strap

has visible signs of wear or damage.

NOTICE

• The rear seat must be in the upright

position to protect against load

displacement in the event of a crash.

The trunk release handle was not

designed to be used to tie down the trunk

lid or as an anchor point when securing

items in the trunk. Improper use of the

trunk release could damage it.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

150

Interior equipment

Trunk lighting

Ontheundersideoftheparcelshelfisalight

that is switched on and off when the trunk is

opened and closed.

• Do not exceed the load capacity of the

car, as this will alter its handling char-

acteristics (see page 294).

• Match your speed and driving style to

how the car is loaded. The handling

characteristics of the car can be

affected since a load in the trunk will

alter the car’s center of gravity.

If the trunk lid is left open, the lighting will be

switched off automatically after 20 minutes

to prevent the battery from running flat.

Cover over emergency opening lever, on

parcel shelf

Emergency opening of the

narrow backrest, Sport Sedan

The narrow section of the backrest can be

opened inan emergency if thecar is without

electricity (not possible to open trunk lid)

and you need to access the trunk for a warn-

ing triangle, for example.

• Removethecover anddepresstheyellow

lever forward.

Tools and spare wheel, see page 270.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interior equipment 151

Folding down the rear seat backrest, SportCombi

WARNING

• Never drive the car if the backrest is not correctly locked into

position as this increases the risk of personal injury in the

event of heavy braking or a crash.

• Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During

sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and trunk

can climb to 160–180°F (70–80°C). Small children are very

susceptible to heat stroke.

• Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.

• When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is

locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since the

center safety belt is mounted in the backrest.

For greater flexibility, the rear seat is split so that the narrow and the

wide part can be folded down separately.

• Adjust the head restraints for the rear seats to be occupied to

a suitable height before riding in the car.

It is easiest to fold down the rear seat backrests if the front seats are

slid forward.

1 Unlock the backrest by pulling the appropriate handle forward.

An unlocked backrest has a red indicator by the handle.

2 Fold the backrest forward.

When returning the backrest to its upright position, make sure that

it locks properly in place. The red indicator by the handle must not

be visible. Also make sure that the seatbelt does not get caught.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

152

Interior equipment

WARNING

• Lay heavy bags on the floor. Place smaller and lighter bags on

top.

• Elastic cargo net 3 : WARNING. Avoid eye injury. DO NOT

overstretch. ALWAYS keep face and body out of recoil path.

DO NOT use when strap has visible signs of wear or damage.

• Secureheavyandbulkyitemsusingthelashingeyesprovided

in the trunk. This will avert the danger of luggage flying around

if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a crash.

• Secure small items if the backrest is folded down. Small items

can also be thrown around inside the car and cause personal

injury.

• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its

handling characteristics (see page 294).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interior equipment 153

Load-through hatch, SportCombi

A load-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest to

enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.

Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and

apply the parking brake. This avoids the danger of the car moving

off if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into gear.

TEMPORARY

FILE

• Fold down the armrest and open the hatch by lifting the handle.

WARNING

• Always secure the load firmly, for example using the middle

safety belt. This reduces the danger of personal injury result-

ing from the displacement of the load on hard braking or in the

event of a crash.

• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its

handling characteristics (see page 294).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

154

Interior equipment

Tie down eyes, 9-3 SportCombi

There are tie down eyes in the trunk that

should be used to secure loads. In general,

loads should be placed as far forward and

as low down as possible in the trunk.

Driving with the trunk lid open, see

page 204.

WARNING

• Put heavy loads as low down and as

far forward as possible in the luggage

compartment, i.e. against the back of

the rear seat.

• Never stack cargo so high that any

part of the cargo lies above the edge

of the backrest, if a cargo guard 3 is

not being used.

• Always tie down the cargo so that it

cannot be thrown forward during

heavy braking or in the event of a

crash.

• Unsecured and heavy cargo can

increase the risk of injury during hard

braking, sudden avoidance manoeu-

vres and in the event of a crash.

• Use the lashing eyes and suitable

anchorage straps 3 for optimum

securing of loads.

• Provide protection on sharp edges to

prevent damage to the cargo straps.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interior equipment 155

Cargo net 3

• If possible, avoid having the rear seat

foldeddownwhendrivingwithaheavy

load, because the anchoring possibili-

ties are restricted when the rear seat

is in this position. That the rear seat

is in the upright is a basic require-

ment for protection against cargo

displacement in the event of a

crash.

WARNING

• Never overload the cargo net 3 . If the

elastic breaks this may cause

personalinjury. Donotuseacargonet

that shows signs of wear.

• Never use the elastic floor net 3 and

elasticsidenet 3 whentherearseatis

folded down. These nets are only

intended to keep light objects tidy, not

for the anchoring of loads.

• Improve safety by fastening the outer

seatbelts. Check that the red "indica-

tor-flag"nexttotheopeninghandlesis

not visible. If the red "indicator-flag" is

visible the backrest is not locked.

Example of cargo anchoring

• Secure the load in the luggage

compartment firmly. Usingacargonet

is not considered as load securing.

• Match your speed and driving style to

how the car is loaded. The handling

characteristics of the car can be

affected since a load in the trunk will

alter the car’s center of gravity.

• The only purpose of a cargo net is to

prevent light objects from being

thrown forward into the cabin during

heavy breaking.

• An object weighing 55 lbs. (25 kg)

corresponds to a weight of 2200 lbs.

(1,000 kg) in a front-end collision at

32 mph (50 km/h).

• Adjust the car’s load (passengers and

luggage) so that the gross vehicle

weight and the axle weight are not

exceeded, see page 294.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

156

Interior equipment

Cargo net, vertical 3 , SportCombi

Fit the net behind the rear seat backrest.

1 Remove the rear cover panels in the

roof.

2 Fit the net’s upper fasteners into the two

rear attachment points in the roof.

3 Secure the net’s hooks in the two

anchorage eyes closest to the rear seat.

Tension the straps.

The cargo net can also be fitted behind the

front seats when the whole rear seat is

folded.

1 Remove the front cover panels in the

roof.

Attaching the cargo net to the roof

Cargo net fitted in front anchorage eye

2 Snap the net’s upper fasteners into the

two front attachment points in the roof.

3 Secure the net’s hooks in the two outer

eyes furthest back on the front seats’

rails down by the floor. Tension the

straps.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interior equipment 157

Cargo net, floor mounted 3 , SportCombi

1 Fold up the floor. Position the edges of

the floor in the slots in the side pieces.

2 Fit the bag/carrier on the lower floor and

secure the net’s hooks in the folded-up

floor.

Cargo net, floor mounted, SportCombi

1 Upper bracket. Make sure that the rubber

bands are not twisted

Cargo net, floor mounted, SportCombi

with subwoofer

1 Upper bracket. Make sure that the rubber

bands are not twisted

2 Lower anchorage point

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

158

Interior equipment

(This page has been left blank.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 159

Starting and driving

Ignition switch ________

Steering wheel lock____

Starting the engine ____

160

162

Economical driving_____ 193

Driving in cold weather__ 195

Driving in hot climates __ 197

Towing a trailer 3_______ 198

Important considerations

for driving __________

164

167

171

172

Driving with a roof rack

load ________________ 202

Refueling ____________

Engine Break-in Period_

Manual transmission___

Driving with a load _____ 204

Driving with the trunk lid

open________________ 204

Automatic

transmission 3 ______

173

179

180

Driving in deep water ___ 204

Driving at night ________ 205

Towing the car_________ 205

Cruise control ________

Braking______________

Traction Control System

(TCS) ______________

Driving with the compact

spare tire____________ 208

183

Electronic Stability

Program (ESP) 3 _____

Jump starting _________ 208

For long trips__________ 211

185

187

Parking brake_________

Parking______________

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,

market specification, options or accessories).

Saab Parking

Assistance 3 ________

190

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

160

Starting and driving

Ignition switch

WARNING

The ignition switch is located on the center

console between the front seats. In cars

with automatic transmission, the remote

control can only be removed when the

selector lever is in position P.

• Always remove the remote control

before leaving children unattended in

the car.

• Apply the parking brake before remov-

ing the remote control.

NOTICE

• Never remove the remote control

while the car is moving. This will acti-

vate thesteeringwheel lockandmake

it impossible to steer the car.

Take care not to spill drinks or to drop

crumbs over the ignition switch. If dirt or

liquid gets into it, the switch may not

operate properly.

If snow from clothing falls into the ignition

switch and melts, the ignition switch can

seize (freeze). Brush snow off clothing

before getting into the car.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 161

To allow the various systems in the car time

to register that the remote control has been

inserted into the ignition switch, do not turn

the remote control for roughly half a second.

LOCK position

Theparkinglights,hazardwarninglightsandinteriorlightingcanbeturned

on.

Cars with automatic transmission: Move the gear lever to P.

The gear lever is locked in position. This is the only position in which the

remote control can be removed.

Cars with manual transmission: The remote control can be removed

regardless of the position of the gear lever.

OFF position

Parts of the electrical system are operative.

Do not leave the remote control in the OFF position with the engine

not running as this could cause the battery to run flat in a matter of

hours.

Cars with automatic transmission: The gear lever is not locked. See

also page 174.

If the remote control is turned from ON to OFF before the car is stationary

then turning to LOCK may not be possible. In which case turn the remote

control to the ON position until the ABS lamp goes out, approx. 2 s. Fol-

lowing which, turn it back to OFF.

ON position

The entire electrical system is operative.

Do not leave the remote control in the ON position when the engine

is not running.

Turn the remote control to the OFF position to disconnect the electrical

system.

WhenyouturntheremotecontroltoON, someindicatorandwarninglights

willcomeon in the maininstrument panel. Theseshould goout after about

3 seconds.

ST - starter position

The starter motor operates (automatic transmission: selector lever must

be in P or N) when the remote control is turned to this position. When

released, the remote control will spring back to the ON position.

Thecar has anelectronic restart lock. Iftheenginefails tostart, theremote

control must first be turned back to a position between OFF and LOCK

before the starter motor can be operated again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

162

Starting and driving

If a fault arises affecting the steering wheel

lock, the following message will be

displayed on the SID:

Steering wheel lock

Starting the engine

The steering wheel lock is electronic. The

lock engages when the remote control is

removedfromtheignitionandunlockswhen

the remote controlisinserted. A clickcanbe

heard when the steering wheel lock locks

and unlocks.

WARNING

Steering lock malfunc.

Make a safe stop.

Contact Saab dealer.

• When starting the engine:

- Sit down in the driver’s seat.

Ifthesteeringwheellockmalfunctionswhile

the remote control is in the ignition switch,

this may prevent the removal of the remote

control or prevent the car from being

restarted once the engine has been

switched off.

If you have to leave the car, lock the car by

pressing down the lock buttons on the

doors. Lock the front left door from outside

with the traditional key (see page 52). The

car is now locked but the alarm is inactive.

- Depress the clutch pedal fully (M/T). If

the gear lever is not in the neutral posi-

tion, the clutch pedal must be fully

depressed or the car will jump

forwards or backwards, which may

cause a crash.

- Never start the car from outside the

vehicle, e.g. through a window that is

down. This could lead to serious

personal injury.

If the car is parked with one front wheel

touching the curb, for example, you may

need to turn the steering wheel slightly

when you insert the remote control to allow

the steering wheel lock to unlock. If you do

not succeed on first attempt you must

remove the remote control before trying

again. Turn the steering wheel and insert

the remote control into the ignition switch.

If the steering wheel lock does not disen-

gageitwillnotbepossibletoturntheremote

control in the ignition switch.

• Cars with automatic transmission:

selectpositionPtoremovetheignition

key. The key can only be removed in

this gear position.

The followingmessage is shown on the SID:

Steering wheel locked.

Pull out key, turn steering

wheel. Try again.

• Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colorless,

odorless, poisonous gas. Be alert to

the danger of CO – always open the

garage doors before starting the

engine in the garage.

• Do not rest or sleep in the car when

parked with the engine running. There

is a risk of depressing the accelerator

which could lead to engine damage.

• There is also a danger of CO poison-

ing if the exhaust system is leaking.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 163

Cars with automatic transmission

The selector lever must be in the P or N

position.

Starting the engine

Useful tips on starting the engine

If the engine has failed to start after several

attempts in very cold weather, proceed as

follows:

Avoid racing the engine or loading it heavily

before it has warmed up. Do not drive away

before the warning and indicator lights have

gone out.

The engine has an automatic choke and

should be started as follows:

1 The selector lever must be in the P or N

position.

2 Keep your foot on the brake pedal.

Note! Once the engine has started, the

brake pedal will sink. This is perfectly

normal.

3 Start the engine. Let the remote control

spring back as soon as the engine has

started and is running smoothly.

1 Turn the ignition switch to ON (it is

essential that you turn the ignition to

ON before depressing the accelerator).

2 Presstheacceleratortothefloorandrun

the starter motor for 5-10 seconds. This

will prevent the engine being flooded

(fully depressed accelerator cuts off the

fuel supply).

Cars with manual transmission

Tostartthe engine the clutchpedal must

be fully depressed.

1 Make sure the parking brake is applied.

3 Now start the engine in the normal way

- do not touch the accelerator.

Iftheenginestallsimmediatelyafterstarting

(e.g. if the clutch was released too quickly),

donottouchtheacceleratorwhenrestarting

the engine.

Allow the engine to idle for about

10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle for at

least 3 minutes after starting.

2 Depress the clutch pedal but do not

touch the accelerator.

3 Start the engine. Let the remote control

spring back as soon as the engine has

started and is running smoothly.

Allow the engine to idle for about

10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle for at

least 3 minutes after starting.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

164

Starting and driving

2 Stopping the engine

Important

NOTICE

• Do not rev the engine immediately

before switching it off - stop the engine

when it is idling.

considerations for

driving

• If the engine sounds strange there is a

malfunction. We recommend that you

contact a Saab dealer immediately.

3 Regulating the boost pressure

1 Starting and driving

• The use of fuel with too low an octane

rating can cause serious engine

damage.

• One of the advantages of boost pres-

sure regulation is that the engine can

also be run safely on gasoline with a

lower octane rating, although not lower

than AON 87. However, engine perfor-

mance will fall slightly and heavy load-

ingandlaboringshouldbeavoided. For

optimum performance, use the recom-

mended grade of fuel.

• Do not use full throttle until the engine

is warm, so as to avoid unnecessary

wear. If the needle of the turbo gauge

repeatedly enters the red zone, the

engine may suddenly lose power, due

to the initiation of a monitoring system

that limits the boost pressure. We

recommend that you contact a Saab

dealer as soon as possible.

• Under certain barometric conditions

(high outside temperature and/or high

altitude) the needle may enter the first

part of the red zone without necessarily

indicating that a fault has arisen.

Limp-home

The engine management system has a

diagnostic feature that checks a number of

internal functions. If a fault is detected in the

throttle valve, the engine management

system will set the throttle system to the

limp-home mode. This means:

• The maximum boost pressure is regu-

lated according to the tendency of the

engine to knock. Short-lived knocking

is perfectly normal. This can occur

when the engine is running at about

3,000 rpm under a heavy load. The

extent of this knocking will depend on

the grade of fuel in the tank.

• idling control will be poor (uneven idling

since regulated by ignition and fuel

supply)

• engine performance will be reduced

• the cruise control will not function

• Aprotectivefunction(interruptionofthe

fuel supply) limits the engine speed.

• thecapacityoftheA/Ccompressor willbe

limited.

• Isolated instances of knocking can

occur with low-octane fuel. This

controlledformofknocking, followedby

a reduction in the boost pressure, is a

sign that the control system is working

normally, and is perfectly safe for the

engine.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 165

Ifthediagnosisfunctiondetectsafaultinthe

engine management system, the light

"Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)" in

the instrument panel will come on (see

page 85). Have the car checked at a work-

shop as soon as possible. We recommend

that you contact a Saab dealer.

• Have the car serviced regularly in accor-

dance with the service program.

Important considerations with

catalytic converters

The catalytic converter is an emission con-

trol device incorporated in the car’s exhaust

system. It consists of a metal canister with a

honeycomb insert, the cells of which have

walls coated in a catalytic layer (precious

metal alloy).

• Always be alert to any misfiring of the

engine (not running on all cylinders) and

any loss of power or performance. At the

first sign of a malfunction, reduce speed

and take the car to a workshop. We

recommend that you contact a Saab

dealer.

• Iftheenginefails tostart(inseverecoldor

if the battery is flat), the car can be bump

started (manual transmission only) or

started using jump leads to a donor

battery. However, as soon as you have

started the engine, it is important that it

runs on all cylinders. If it is misfiring, allow

it to idle for up to 5 minutes to give it time

to settle and run smoothly. If, after this

time, the engine still fails to run properly,

switch off the engine to avoid serious

damage to the catalytic converter. We

recommend that you contact a Saab

dealer for advice.

NOTICE

"Engine malfunction (CHECK

Use only unleaded gasoline. Leaded

gasoline is detrimental to the catalyst and

oxygen sensor and will seriously impair

the function of the catalytic converter.

ENGINE)" warning light starts to flash

(indicating that the engine is misfiring and

the catalytic converter can be damaged),

ease off the accelerator slightly. The light

should go out or start to shine constantly.

If the light continues to flash despite

easing off the accelerator, you may

continue to drive the car but at the mini-

mum throttle permitted by the current traf-

fic situation. Have the car checked as

soon as possible. We recommend that

you contact a Saab dealer.

To ensure that the catalytic converter con-

tinuestofunctionproperly, andalsotoavoid

damage to the converter and its associated

components, the following points must be

observed:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

166

Starting and driving

• Never park the car on dry grass or other

combustible material. The catalytic

converter gets very hot and could there-

fore start a fire.

NOTICE

Ifthecarrunsoutofgas,airmaybedrawn

in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause

the catalytic converter to be damaged by

overheating.

• Never drive off if the engine is misfiring.

• If you bump start the car when the engine

isalreadyatnormalworkingtemperature,

the engine must start to run on all cylin-

ders. Abort bump starting if the engine

fails to start immediately.

WARNING

Failure to strictly follow these instructions

can result in damage to the catalytic con-

verter and associated components, and

could represent a breach of the warranty

conditions.

If the engine is being run with the car on a

rolling road or dynamometer, to ensure

adequate cooling, air must be blown into

the engine compartment and under the

car at a rate equivalent to the ram-air

effect that would obtain at the corre-

sponding road speed.

Engine management system with catalytic

converter

1 Engine control module

2 Oxygen sensor

3 Catalytic converter

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 167

Refueling

NOTICE

WARNING

• Do not overfill. Fuel should not come

right up the filler pipe as room for

expansion is needed for when the

temperature rises.

The engine control module (ECM) moni-

toring the engine parameters also stores

fault codes.

Ifyouspillfuelandthensomethingignites

it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can

spray out on you if you open the fuel cap

too quickly. This spray can happen if your

tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot

weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and

wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then

unscrew the cap all the way.

Under certain circumstances, this may

cause constant illumination of the Engine

malfunction (CHECK ENGINE) lamp

• The use of fuel with too low an octane

rating can cause serious engine

damage.

, thus indicating a fault that must be

checked by your Saab dealer, see

page 85.

• Clean fuel from painted surfaces as

soon as possible.

Gasoline fumes are highly explosive.

Therefore:

NOTE: always observe the following two

measures:

• never smoke while refueling

• Make sure that the fuel filler cap is

screwed on correctly before the

engine is started. Screw on the fuel

filler cap until you hear a distinct click.

• never use gasoline for any purpose

other than as engine fuel

• gasoline is extremely flammable and

can cause severe burns. No open or

exposed flames near gasoline

• Avoid driving with the fuel low level

indicator illuminated. The symbol illu-

minateswhenlessthanapproximately

2.5 gallons (10 litres) of fuel remains

in the tank.

• do not use a mobile phone at the

same time as refueling

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

168

Starting and driving

Refueling

NOTICE

WARNING

Do not overfill. Fuel should not come right

up the filler pipe as expansion room is

needed when the temperature rises.

If a fire starts while you are refueling, do

notremovethenozzle. Shutoff theflow of

fuel by shutting off the pump or by notify-

ing the station attendant. Leave the area

immediately.

• Fill to maximum filling capacity.

• Stop filling after the first time that the

nozzle trips to shut off the flow of fuel.

• Filling capacity can differ between

different fuel stations and outside

temperature. Fuel tank volume when

nozzle trips to shut off, may vary by

0.5 gal. (2 liters).

1 Switch off the engine.

2 Open the filler cap, located in the right-

hand rear fender.

Filler cap

3 Insert the fuel pump nozzle beyond the

flange on the filler pipe and let the first

mark (a ring, a pimple or the first spring-

coil) rest on the flange. Do not withdraw

the nozzle while filling is in progress.

4 Cease refueling the first time the pump

stops, and wait a few seconds after

you´ve finished pumping before you

remove the nozzle.

• Do not fill fuel all the way up the filler

pipe. The gasoline must be allowed

room for expansion especially during

hot weather.

Filler cap

To remove the filler cap, turn it slowly to the

left (counterclockwise). The filler cap has a

spring in it; if you let go of the cap too soon,

it will spring back to the right.

When you put the filler cap back on, turn it

to the right (clockwise) until you hear three

clicks. Make sure you fully install the cap.

The most effective way to prevent conden-

sation forming in the tank (and thus avoid

possible running problems) is to keep the

tank full.

Refer to page 195 for information regarding

gasoline anti-freeze.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 169

Filling a portable fuel container

WARNING

Fuel (Gasoline Engine)

Fuel

Use of the recommended fuel is an impor-

tant part of the proper maintenance of your

vehicle.

For optimum performance Saab recom-

mends:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it

is in your vehicle. Static electricity

discharge from the container can ignite

the gasoline vapor. You can be badly

burned and your vehicle damaged if this

occurs. To help avoid injury to you and

others:

• 2.0t 175 hp – AON 90.

• 2.0T 210 hp – AON 90.

• 2.8 V6 230 hp and 250 hp — AON 90.

• Dispense gasoline only into approved

containers.

Gasoline Octane

When refueling, hang the filler cap inside

the fuel door

• Do not fill a container while it is inside

a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup

bed or on any surface other than the

ground.

Use regular unleaded gasoline with a

posted octane of 87 or higher. If the octane

is less than 87, you may get a heavy knock-

ing noise when you drive. If this occurs, use

a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as

soon as possible. Otherwise, you might

damage your engine. A little pinging noise

when you accelerate or drive uphill is con-

sidered normal. This does not indicate a

problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel

is necessary. If you are using 87 octane or

higher-octane fuel and hear heavy knock-

ing, your engine needs service.

The fuel door has a built in filler cap holder

slot located on the fuel door. Slide the white

ring on the cap into the slot.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure

togettherighttype. Yourdealercangetone

for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not

fit properly.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the

inside of the fill opening before operat-

ing the nozzle. Contact should be

maintained until the filling is complete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gaso-

line.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

170

Starting and driving

Gasoline Specifications

California Fuel

Additives

It is recommended that gasoline meet spec-

ifications which were developed by automo-

bile manufacturers around the world and

contained in the World-Wide Fuel Charter

which is available from the Alliance of Auto-

mobile Manufacturers at www.autoalli-

ance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline meet-

ing these specifications could provide

improved driveability and emission control

system performance compared to other

gasoline.

If your vehicle is certified to meet California

Emission Standards (see the underhood

emission control label), it is designed to

operate on fuels that meet California speci-

fications. If this fuel is not available in states

adopting California emissions standards,

your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on

fuels meeting federal specifications, but

emission control system performance may

be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp

may turn on and your vehicle may fail a

smog-check test. See Engine malfunction

(CHECK ENGINE) on page 85. If this

occurs, return to your authorized Saab

dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that

the condition is caused by the type of fuel

used, repairs may not be covered by your

warranty.

To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the

United States are now required to contain

additives that will help prevent engine and

fuel system deposits from forming, allowing

your emission control system to work prop-

erly. You should not have to add anything to

yourfuel.However, somegasolinescontain

only the minimum amount of additive

required to meet U.S. Environmental Pro-

tection Agency regulations. Saab recom-

mends that you buy gasolines that are

advertised to help keep fuel injectors and

intake valves clean. If your vehicle experi-

ences problems due to dirty injectors or

valves, try a different brand of gasoline.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as

ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gaso-

lines may be available in your area to con-

tribute to clean air. Saab recommends that

you use these gasolines, particularly if they

comply with the specifications described

earlier.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed

for fuel that contains methanol. Do not

use fuel containing methanol. It can cor-

rode metal parts in your fuel system and

also damage the plastic and rubber

parts. That damage would not be cov-

ered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated

for low emissions may contain an octane-

enhancing additive called methylcyclopen-

tadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask

the attendant where you buy gasoline

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 171

whether the fuel contains MMT. Saab does

not recommend the use of such gasolines.

Wearing in new brake pads

Engine Break-in Period

New brake pads take time to bed in, about

90 miles (150 km) if the car is driven largely

under stop-and-go conditions or about

300 miles (500 km) of highway driving.

To extend the useful life of the pads, avoid

hard braking as much as possible.

Pistons, cylinder bores and bearings need

time to obtain uniform, wear-resistant

surfaces.

Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of

spark plugs and the performance of the

emission control system may be affected.

Themalfunctionindicator lampmayturnon.

Ifthisoccurs,returntoyourauthorizedSaab

dealer for service.

If a new engine is driven too hard, this grad-

ual process of bedding-in will not be possi-

ble and the life of the engine will be short-

ened.

Fuels in Foreign Countries

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

do not exceed 5,000 rpm.

In addition, refrain from driving the car at full

throttle, other than for brief instances,

during the first 1,800 miles (3,000 km).

If you plan on driving in another country out-

side the United States or Canada, the

proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use

leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recom-

mended in the previous text on fuel. Costly

repairs caused by use of improper fuel

would not be covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto

club, or contact a major oil company that

does business in the country where you will

be driving.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

172

Starting and driving

Manual transmission

Clutch interlock

To start the car, the clutch pedal must be

depressed.

When changing gear, fully depress the

clutch pedal and then release it smoothly. It

isinadvisabletodrivewithyourhandresting

on the gear lever, as this can increase the

wear on the gearbox.

Before reverse (R) can be engaged, you

must lift the ring underneath the gear knob.

Gear positions, 5-speed

Gear positions, 6-speed

NOTICE

When reverse gear is to be engaged,

the car must be at a standstill with

the accelerator fully released.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 173

Automatic

transmission 3

WARNING

• Depressthebrakepedalwhenshifting

the selector lever from P or N.

Indication of gear position on main

instrument panel

• The car must be at a standstill before

P,RorNisselected. Youhavetohave

your foot on the brake pedal to move

the lever out of P. If the car is still

moving when a drive position is subse-

quently selected, this could cause a

crash or damage the automatic trans-

mission.

The engine can only be started when the

selector lever is in the P or N position.

When the car is stationary, the engine must

be idling when you move the selector lever

from one position to another. If not, the

transmission could be damaged.

Selector lever

1 Position for manual gear selection

The remote control can only be removed

when the selector lever is in the P position.

• Never park the car with the selector

lever in a drive position, even if the

parking brake is on.

NOTICE

After selecting a drive position, pause

brieflytoallow thegear toengage(thecar

starts to pull a little) before you acceler-

ate.

• If you want to leave the car with the

engine running, move the selector

lever to P or N and apply the parking

brake.

The automatic transmission has an elec-

tronic control module. The control module

receives information including accelerator

position and road speed. Using this and

other information, it controls the hydraulic

pressure of the transmission to ensure that

gear changing is as smooth as possible.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

174

Starting and driving

Adaptive gear change patterns

Thermal transmission protection

The adaptive gear change pattern function

adapts gear changing to the prevailing driv-

ing conditions. The transmission control

module senses the engine load, vehicle

speed and temperature of the transmission.

A suitable gear change pattern is then

selected automatically to avoid unneces-

sarygearchangesandundesiredincreases

in transmission temperature.

Certain variants use a special change pat-

ternforthefirstfew minutesafteracoldstart

so that the catalytic converter reaches its

working temperature more quickly.

The transmission has built-in protection

against overheating. This protection is pro-

vided by the controlmodule, whichchanges

gear change patterns.

1 If the temperature of the transmission

fluid exceeds 257°F (125°C), the gear

change pattern is changed.

2 If the temperature of the transmission

fluid exceeds 275°F (135°C), the gear

change pattern is again changed.

3 If the temperature of the transmission

fluid exceeds 302°F (150°C), engine

torque will be limited to 147 ft.lbs.

(200 Nm).

Selector lever detent

The followingmessage is shown on the SID:

Park Brake Shift Lock

Gearbox too hot.

The transmission has a security function

known as Park Brake Shift Lock. To move

the gear selector lever out of the P or N posi-

tion, the gear selector lever detent (catch)

must be pressed in at the same time as the

brake pedal is held depressed.

The detent button on the selector lever has

to be pressed in before the lever can be

moved between certain positions.

Make a safe stop.

Open hood to cool down.

If this message appears, stop the car as

soon as it is safe to do so and allow the

engine to idle until the message has gone

out. The selector lever should be in

position P.

Temporary override of Park Brake Shift

Lock, see page 176.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 175

Lock-up

Limp-home

The transmission’s torque converter has a

lock-up function. This can lock the torque

converter, thus reducing the engine speed

and fuel consumption.

WARNING

NOTICE

Remembertousethebrakingeffectofthe

engine (1st, 2nd or 3rd gear) when you

are descending long or steep hills to

spare the brakes.

Do not tow a trailer if limp-home mode is

engaged.

Kick-down

When the accelerator is pressed down fully,

a down change is made to optimize acceler-

ation, e.g. for overtaking.

Following this, the next higher gear will be

selected at the optimum engine speed,

unless you ease off the accelerator before

reaching this.

If the transmission malfunctions, the control

module will activate limp-home mode. Driv-

ability will be affected to varying degrees.

Overheating can cause the brakes to

fade!

The followingmessage is shown on the SID:

Towing

Gearbox malfunction.

Limited performance.

Contact Saab dealer.

Towingofcarswithautomatictransmission,

see page 205.

Driving in hilly country with a

heavy load

Descending hills

In this mode, only 2nd and 5th gears are

available. Select 2nd gear when driving at

low speeds and 5th gear at higher speeds.

2nd gearmustbeselectedmanually. Select

5th gear manually or move the selector

lever to D (see page 178).

If the speed of the car increases while

descending a steep hill, despite the acceler-

ator being released, the control module will

change down. If you desire more powerful

engine braking, manually select a lower

gear (see page 178).

The transmission fluid can overheat when

the gearbox is strained, for example, when

driving with a trailer on hilly roads. To avoid

the transmission fluid overheating, always

drive with the selector lever in the D posi-

tion. Theadaptivegear changepatternsare

then active.

Cars with 5-speed transmission

In this mode, only 2nd and 5th gears are

available. Select 2nd gear when driving at

low speeds and 5th gear at higher speeds.

2nd gearmustbeselectedmanually. Select

5th gear manually or move the selector

lever to D, see page 178.

High air temperatures or a faulty oil cooler

can also cause the transmission fluid to

overheat. Overheating reduces the service

life of the fluid.

Cars with 6-speed transmission 3

• The car may be totally powerless. If this is

case, have the car transported to a work-

shop to have the problem rectified.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

176

Starting and driving

• The car may feel weak but can be driven

carefully to a workshop to have the prob-

lem rectified.

Temporary override of Park Brake Shift

Lock

• Drivability may barely be affected.

NOTICE

Irrespective of the drivability of the car, the

car must be taken to a workshop to have the

problem checked and rectified.

Due to electrical problems it may not be

possible to move the selector lever out of

the park position, even if the ignition is

ON. If for some reason the selector lever

has to be moved out of the park position

(i.e. to tow the car a short distance) do as

described below.

1 Apply the parking brake.

Temporary override of Park Brake Shift

Lock

2 Lift up the rubber mat in the storage

compartment ahead of the selector

lever.

3 Under the floor of the storage compart-

ment is a yellow plastic lever. Use a thin

tool, such as a screwdriver, to press and

hold the plastic lever while moving the

selector lever from P to N.

4 Remove the tool.

5 Release the parking brake if the car is to

be moved immediately, otherwise it

should remain on.

Check fuse 6 in the engine bay fuse box.

If the fuse is OK the battery may be dead.

Contact a workshop to have the problem

checked and rectified. We recommend that

you contact a Saab dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 177

Selector lever positions

You must press the brake pedal to move

the selector lever from the neutral position (N).

Inneutral,thetransmissionisdisengagedfromthe

engine. The engine can be started but make sure

the parking brake is on to prevent unexpected

movement.

The selector lever is locked and the transmission

is mechanically blocked.

The engine can be started.

To move the selector lever out of the P position,

depress the brake pedal and press in the detent

(catch) on the selector lever.

Only select the park position (P) when the car is

stationary.

To prevent the engine and transmission becoming

hotter than necessary, select N for long stops with

theengine running, e.g. when stuck in a traffic jam.

At traffic lights, leave the selector lever in the drive

position (D).

Only select the reverse position (R) when the car

stationary. The detent release button must be

pressed before the selector lever can be moved

to R.

Wait until reverse gear has engaged before

touching the accelerator.

Thedriveposition(D) isthenormaloneforforward

driving. The transmission shifts automatically

between all gears from 1st to 5th, the timing of

which depends on factors such as the current

accelerator position and the speed of the car.

Pause for a moment before applying the acce-

lerator, to allow the gears to engage.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

178

Starting and driving

Sentronic, manual gear selection

Move the selector lever to the manual position (M)

(to the left position D) to select gear manually.

Select a higher gear by pressing the selector lever

forward or a lower gear by pulling it back. The

selector lever will return to a position adjacent to

the letter M after each gear change.

An example of when you may wish to make

manual gear changes is when overtaking, to

enableyou toremainina low gear foran extended

period of time.

Iftheroadsurfaceisslippery,youmaywishtostart

off in 2nd or 3rd to reduce the risk of wheel spin.

Steering wheel controls for manual gear

selection 3

When descending steep hills you should select a

low gear to increase the braking effect of the

engine and thus spare the brakes.

Manual gear selections are displayed on the main instrument

panel. The letter M and the current gear are displayed.

When the selector lever is in the M position, as opposed to the D

position, the engine is much more responsive to changes in accel-

erator position. The accelerator has a different feel.

When changing down, the desired gear can be selected but the

transmission will not change down until the engine speed is low

enough to avoid overrevving.

Certain variants also have steering wheel controls for manual gear

selection. On these models, it is possible to change gear manually

using the selector lever and the steering wheel controls. The steer-

ing wheel controls are only active when the selector lever is in the M

position.

Select a higher gear by pressing the right-hand button and a lower

gear by pressing the left-hand button.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 179

To set the desired speed

1 Slide the switch to ON.

Cruise control

(Cruise control system)

2 Move the thumbwheel up to SET/+ or

SET/– when the car has reached the

desired speed (above 15 mph (25 km/

h)).

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control system in

wetor icy conditions, indense trafficoron

winding roads.

To increase the preset speed

You can increase the speed in any of

the following ways:

For safety reasons (brake system func-

tion), the brakes must be applied once

when the engine has started, before the

cruise control system can be activated.

• Accelerate to the desired speed. Jog the

control to SET/+ or SET/–.

• Jog the control to SET/+ to increase the

speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) (when cruise

control already engaged).

Cruise control switches

The followingmessage is shown on the SID:

The system has the following functions:

• HoldthecontrolintheSET/+positionuntil

the desired speed is reached (when

cruise control already engaged).

Tap brakes lightly before

using cruise control.

1 ON: engaged

2 OFF: disengaged

3 SET/+: sets the speed and increases

the set speed

4 SET/ –: sets the speed and decreases

the set speed

5 RESUME:re-engagesthesystematthe

set speed

The CRUISE indicator light in the main

instrument panel comes onwhentheswitch

is slid to ON. If you switch off the engine

while the cruise control is ON, the system

will be ON the next time the engine is

started.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

180

Starting and driving

To reduce the preset speed

You can reduce speed in any of the follow-

ing ways:

To re-engage the system

Slide the switch to RESUME. The car will

return to the previously set speed. Vehicle

speed must exceed 15 mph (25 km/h).

Braking

It is good practice to try your brakes period-

ically while driving. This is particularly

important when driving in heavy rain, on

roads with a lot of surface water, in snow or

in salty slush. In such conditions a slight

delay in the braking effect may be noticed.

To minimize this delay, dry the brakes by

applying them lightly now and again. This

should also be done after the car has been

washed, and in extremely damp weather.

• Brake to the desired speed. Jog the

control to SET/+ or SET/–.

• Jog the control to SET/– to reduce the

speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

• HoldthecontrolintheSET/–positionuntil

the desired speed is reached.

To disengage the system

The system will be disengaged:

• As soon as the brake or clutch pedal is

depressed (cars with manual transmis-

sion).

• When the switch is slid towards OFF. See

also heading "To disengage the system

temporarily".

• When the switch is slid to OFF.

• When the TCS/ESP system is operative.

• When position N is selected (cars with

automatic transmission).

Temporary increase in speed

To avoid the brakes becoming overheated,

such as when negotiating long descents

with a drop of several hundred yards (hun-

dred metres), select a low gear to utilize the

braking effect of the engine. If the car has

automatic transmission, select 1st or 2nd

gear.

Youcanhelptoprolongthelifeofthebrakes

by thinking ahead and braking harder over

short periods, rather than braking more

moderately over long stretches.

Accelerate, without shifting down (manual

transmission),toexceedthesetspeedsuch

as for overtaking. When you release the

accelerator, the car will return to the set

speed.

To disengage the system

temporarily

Slide the switch to the left towards OFF, but

only as far as to disengage the cruise con-

trol. Allow the switch to spring back.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 181

The brake system provides Electronic

Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distri-

butes the brake pressure between the front

andrearwheels,insuchawayastoachieve

optimum braking performance irrespective

of the car’s speed or load.

The ABS has a built-in diagnostics function

which will switch on the ABS warning light

if a fault is detected in the system (see

page 84).

ABS brakes

WARNING

• It is prudent to try your brakes from

timetotime, especiallywhendrivingin

heavyrain, throughwatercollectedon

the road, in snow, on a wet road

surface or in salty slush. In such condi-

tions, thebrakes may take longer than

normal to take effect. To rectify this,

touch the brake pedal periodically to

dry the brakes out.

• The additional safety afforded by the

ABS system is not designed to allow

drivers to drive faster but to make

normal driving safer.

• Tostop asquickly as possible, without

loss of directional stability, whether

theroadsurfaceisdry,wetorslippery,

press the brake pedal down hard

without letting up (do not pump the

pedal), declutching simulta-

The following message will appear on the

SID (and corresponding symbol on main

instrument unit) if a fault is detected:

• The same applies after the car has

been washed or when the weather is

very humid.

Antilock brake malfunction.

Contact Saab dealer.

neously, and steer the car to safety.

• Avoid parking the car with wet brakes.

Before parking, and if the traffic condi-

tions allow, brake quite heavily so that

thebrakediscsandpadswarmupand

dry.

The Antilock Braking System (ABS) modu-

lates the brake pressureto each wheel. The

pressure is automatically reduced just

before the wheel locks up and then

increases again to the point at which the

wheel is just about to lock. The wheel sen-

sors send information to the brake system’s

electronic control module for every 4 or so

inches (decimetre) that the car rolls. This

information is processed continuously to

ensure that the adjustment of the brake

pressure will be as exact as possible.

Adjustment takes place up to 12 times per

second.

• The brakes are power assisted and it

should be kept in mind that the servo

unit only provides the power assis-

tance when the engine is running.

• Thebrakepressurerequiredwhenthe

engine is off, (e.g. when the car is

being towed) is roughly four times the

normal pedal force required. The

pedal also feels hard and unrespon-

sive.

• Overheating can cause the brakes to

fade!

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

182

Starting and driving

The ABS system will not reduce the braking

distance on loose gravel, snow or ice but,

because the wheels cannot lock up, steer-

ing control is retained.

WhentheABSsystemoperatesyouwillfeel

the brake pedal pulsate and hear a ticking

noise, both of which are perfectly normal.

Apply the brake pedal with full force (you

cannot press too hard), declutch and if nec-

essary steer to safety.

Donotreleasethebrakepedalbeforethe

car has come to a halt or the danger is

past!

The above is critical.

Braking with ABS brakes.

Braking with ABS – evasive steering

If the road is slippery, the ABS system will

operate even when only light pressure is

applied to the brake pedal. This means that

the driver can brake gently to test the condi-

tion of the road and adapt their driving

accordingly.

Indication that the system is operating:

pulsating brake pedal and ticking noise

It is well worth practising the use of ABS

brakes on a skid pan or other suitable

facility.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 183

that one or both of the wheels would lose

their grip were the car not equipped with the

TCS, e.g.:

Hill Start Assist (HSA) 3 Traction Control

System (TCS)

(Hillstarting assistance)

Anti-spin system

• When the car is pulling away or accelerat-

ing with the front wheels on different

surfaces (e.g. one slippery and one dry),

the TCS functions like an electronic differ-

ential lock, making sure that both wheels

rotate at the same speed. The system

also functions when the car is reversing.

This function facilitates starting on a hill.

When the parking brake has been released

and the foot is moved off the brake pedal it

WARNING

can take approx. 1.5 s before the brakes

release. The brakes release as soon as the

When driving normally, the TCS system

accelerator pedal is depressed within this

time.

helps to improve the car’s directional

stability. The TCS must not be regarded

as a system to enable the driver to main-

tain higher speeds. The same precau-

tions must be adopted as normal for safe

cornering and driving on slippery roads.

• When cornering, if the inside front wheel

rotates faster than the other wheels.

TCS OFF

lights up under the speedometer if:

How the system works

• a fault has been detected and the system

has therefore been switched off

• there is a fault in the ABS system

• the system has been switched off

manually.

The Traction Control System (TCS) is

designed to prevent wheelspin. This

enables the car to achieve the best possible

grip and, hence, maximum tractive effort,

together with greater stability.

The TCS uses information from the ABS

wheel sensorstodetect when the front(driv-

ing) wheels are rotating faster then the rear

wheels.

If the two front wheels are rotating faster

than the rear wheels, the torque from the

engine is reduced to eliminate the differ-

ence.

The process continues until all the wheels

are rotating at the same speed.

The advantages of the TCS become most

apparent when the cohesion between the

front wheels and the road surface is so low

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

184

Starting and driving

Turning the TCS off

The TCS is switched on automatically when

the engine is started.

Youcanswitchthesystemoff manuallywith

the TCS button, whereupon the

light

under the speedometer will come on. The

TCS cannot be switched off if the car is trav-

elling faster than 35 mph (60 km/h).

It may benecessary toswitchoffthesystem

if the car has become bogged down, for

instance. Press TCS to switch it on again.

If a fault is detected in the ABS, the TCS will

be switched off automatically.

Thefollowingmessageis shownontheSID:

TCS button

Traction control failure.

Contact Saab dealer.

TCS indicator

WhentheremotecontrolisturnedtotheON

position, the lamp is lit for about 4 seconds

while the system performs self-diagnosis.

The cruise control system (if active) will

automatically be disengaged if the TCS is

operative.

The

light under the speedometer

comes on whenthe TCS is operative, that is

when one of the wheels has lost its grip.

The fact that the TCS is operative indicates

thatthelimitforgriphasbeenexceededand

that the driver must exercise greater care.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 185

How the ESP system works

Electronic Stability

Program (ESP) 3

Anti-skid system

TheElectronicStability Programcanhelpto

prevent the car from skidding by braking

one or several wheels independently of the

driver. The engine output is then also

reduced to prevent the driving wheels from

spinning. Thecarhassensorsthatmeasure

wheel speed, yaw rate, lateral acceleration,

steering wheel position and braking pres-

sure. The values provided by these sensors

are used to calculate the actual direction of

the car, the intentions of the driver and

whether the ESP should be engaged.

If this direction does not agree with that

intended by the driver, calculated from the

steering wheel position, the ESP is

engaged.

WARNING

When driving normally, the ESP system

helps to improve the car’s directional

stability. The ESP must not be regarded

as a system to enable the driver to main-

tain higher speeds. The same precau-

tions must be adopted as normal for safe

cornering and driving on slippery roads

must be adopted.

The Electronic Stability Program employs

both the antilock braking system (ABS) and

the traction control system (TCS). It is a

system that helps the driver to stabilize the

car in unusual circumstances that can oth-

erwise be difficult to handle.

The ESP improves the driver’s chances

of retaining control over the car in a critical

situation.

Illustration of how the system applies the

brakes on one or several wheels in order

to reduce the likelihood of the car skidding

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

186

Starting and driving

If a fault is detected in the system, the

following message will be displayed on

the SID:

ESP indicator light

When theremotecontrolis turnedtotheON

position, the lamp is lit for about 4 seconds

while the system performs self-diagnosis.

Stability control failure.

Contact Saab dealer.

The

light under the speedometer

comesonfor ashortperiodoftimewhenthe

ESP system is operative.

Operation of the ESP indicates reduced

cohesion between the tires and the road,

and that extra care should be taken by the

driver.

The cruise control system (if active) will

automatically be disengaged if the ESP is

operative.

NOTICE

Turning ESP system off

ESP button

Changes to the chassis, such as a

change of wheels, shock absorbers or

springs, could affect the function of the

ESP system.

The system can be turned off manually with

the ESP button, whereupon the

light

under the speedometer will come on. The

car must be travelling slower than 35 mph

(60 km/h). The TCS is also disengaged.

ESP OFF

Always consult aworkshop before chang-

ing any chassis components. We recom-

mend that you contact a Saab dealer.

lights up under the speedometer if:

TheESP is alwaysengaged during braking,

even if it has been switched off manually

with the ESP button.

• a fault has been detected and the system

has therefore been switched off

• the system has been switched off

manually

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 187

Parking brake

Parking

WARNING

• Always apply the parking brake when

you park the car. If the car is to be

left parked for a long time, refer to

page 189.

• Never leave children or pets unat-

tended in the car. In warm, sunny

weather, the temperature inside the

car can reach 160–180°F (70–80°C).

• Always apply the parking brake

• Park where the vehicle will not create

an obstruction or a hazard to other

road users.

before removing the remote control.

• Do not use the parking brake while

driving.

• Do not park on dry grass or other

combustible material. The catalytic

converter gets very hot andcouldstart

a fire.

Correct hold

• Grasp the parking brake lever in such

awaythatnofingersgettrappedwhen

you release the parking brake.

If the parking brake is applied when the car

starts off, the following message will appear

on the SID:

• Apply the parking brake, remove the

remote control and lock the car.

The parking brake lever is situated between

the front seats. The brake acts on the rear

wheels. When the parking brake is applied,

Release parking brake.

the

indicator light on the main instru-

ment panel will come on.

To release the parking brake, lift the lever

slightly, pull the releasebuttononthe under-

side of the lever and lower the lever.

If conditions allow, it is best if the brake

pedal is not depressed, or only depressed

as little as necessary so as to stop the car

from rolling, when the parking brake is

applied.

To facilitate releasing the parking brake,

depress the brake pedal. This is especially

appropriate if the car is standing on a hill.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

188

Starting and driving

NOTICE

Empty the car yourself and bear in mind:

• Never leave a mobile phone, camera,

computer or similar object visible in

the car.

• Clothing, packages and bags attract

thieves.

• Do not leave small objects such as

CDs, sunglasses and coins visible.

• If possible, park in a well-lit, conspicu-

ous parking space.

1 Downhill with curb.

Turn the wheels toward

thecurbandedgethecar

forwards until the wheel

lightly touches the curb.

2 Uphill with curb. Turn

thewheelsawayfromthe

curb and edge the car

backward until the wheel

lightly touches the curb.

3 Uphill or downhill with-

out curb. Turn the wheel

towards the edge of the

road so that the car,

should it move, will not

roll towards the middle of

the road.

• Thieves strike whenever and wher-

ever they are given the opportunity.

Parking on a hill

When parking on a steep hill, turn the front

wheels so that they will be blocked by the

curb if the car should move.

If the car is parked with one front wheel

touching the curb, for example, you may

need to turn the steering wheel slightly

when you insert the remote control to allow

the steering wheel lock to unlock.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 189

• Park the car in a dry, covered and well-

ventilated building. Leave the parking

brake OFF!

• Convertible: If the car is stored, the soft

top should be closed.

Long-term parking

If the car is not going to be used for some

time, e.g. three tofour months, the following

steps are recommended:

• Drain the washer fluid reservoir and

hoses.

• Wash and wax the car. Clean the rubber

seals on the hood, trunk lid and doors,

and lubricate them with glycerol

(glycerine).

• After washing the car, dry the brake discs

to avoid corrosion by taking the car out on

the road and applying the brakes a few

times.

• Fill the fuel tank to prevent condensation

forming in it.

• If necessary, use wheel chocks and leave

the parking brake off.

• Disconnect the negative (–) battery lead.

If frost is likely to occur during the storage

period, remove the battery and store it in

a frost-free place.

• If it is not possible to stand the car on axle

stands, increase the tire pressure to

43 psi (3 bar).

Leave all the door windows open a crack

and cover the car with a non-plastic

tarpaulin–notonemadeofplasticwhichwill

not breath.

• Top up the coolant and check the anti-

freeze before the onset of winter.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

190

Starting and driving

Saab Parking

Assistance 3

Saab Parking Assistance

WARNING

Responsibility always lies with the driver

when reversing.

• The parking assistance system can

facilitate parking and reversing.

• Bear in mind that small objects, such

as a child lying on the ground, and

narrow objects cannot always be

detected by the system.

Area monitored by the sensors seen from

the side

Area monitored by the sensors seen from

above

The system uses four sensors in the rear

bumper. These emit ultrasound signals that

bounce back to the sensors off any objects

behind the car. The system, however,

cannot always detect small or narrow

objects, such as a post, since the surface

area presented to the car is too small.

The system is activated automatically when

reverse is engaged or selected. Audible

confirmation is given and the following text

is shown on the SID:

Saab Parking Assistance facilitates parking

and reversing. There are four sensors in the

rear bumper that detect objects up to 6 ft

(1.8 meters) behind the car.

If the car is heavily laden, the system may

falsely indicate that there is an object within

the detection range. This is since the sen-

sors are angled towards the ground when

the car is tail-heavy.

Parking assistance active

If a warning message, such as the seatbelt

reminder,isshownontheSIDwhenreverse

is engaged, the audible signals from the

parking assistance system will not be heard

since the warning message has priority.

When the sensors detect an object within

the monitored area, pulses of sound (- - - -)

will be heard. Thefrequency of these pulses

increases as the car comes closer to the

object.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 191

If you stop the car with reverse gear

engaged, the sound pulse will stop after

2 seconds. The sound pulses will return if

you continue to reverse. If the car rolls for-

ward while reverse is engaged, the system

is silenced.

When the distance to the object is less

than 1 ft. (30 cm), a continuous tone will

be heard.

When an object is approximately 3 ft.

(90 cm) from the car, the sound pulses

change character markedly (frequency

increases). A distance of about 3 ft. (90 cm)

is suitable if you wish to load or unload the

trunk.

If the distance between an object and a

corner sensor does not change for

3 seconds, for example if you are reversing

alongside a wall, the system will switch to

monitoring straight back. The system indi-

cates if the distance to the wall decreases

again.

Cars with trailer hitch

If the car has a trailer hitch and its wiring is

correctly connected to the car’s electrical

system, the Saab Parking Assistance auto-

matically compensates for the protrusion of

the tow bar.

If a camper or trailer is hitched up and the

trailer hitch wiring is correctly connected to

the car’s electrics, the system is automati-

cally deactivated.

NOTICE

The sensors must be kept clean to func-

tion well. Ice, snow and dirt can affect

their sensitivity.

Large quantities of snow or dirt covering

the sensors can prevent the parking

assistance system from detecting any

objects.

You can temporarily deactivate the Saab

Parking Assistance as follows:

Do not spray the sensors with a pressure

washer, as this can damage them.

• Engage reverse and press the CLEAR

button on the SID control panel.

The system will be reactivated the next time

you engage reverse.

Reversing alongside a wall

If the distance between an object and a

corner sensor does not change for

2 seconds, for example if you are reversing

alongside a wall, the system will switch to

monitoring straight back. The system indi-

cates if the distance to the wall decreases

again.

If a trailer is hitched up and correctly con-

nected to the trailer contact by the tow bar,

the system is automatically deactivated.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

192

Starting and driving

Error messages

If the system malfunctions, the following

message will appear on the SID:

The system can be switched off using

Profiler.

Explanation of SPA on and SPA off.

SPA on

1 Press the CUSTOMIZE button to go to

Profiler.

2 Select Park Assistance using the

INFO dial.

Saab Parking Assistance is activated

automatically when reverse is

engaged. The system warns of objects

behind the car.

Parking assistance

malfunction.

Contact Saab dealer.

3 Press in the INFO dial.

If a trailer is hitched up and correctly

connected to the trailer connector, the

system will be deactivated automati-

cally. You can also deactivate the sys-

temtemporarilywiththe CLEAR button

if reverse has been engaged and the

system is active.

If the system is subject to interference, the

following message will be shown on the

SID:

4 Select SPA on or SPA off.

5 Confirm this selection by pressing the

INFO dial.

Parking assistance sensor

interference.

Park Assistance

SPA on

SPA off

If this message appears, clean the sensors.

The sensors are located in the black trim on

the rear bumper

Saab Parking Assistance deactivated.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 193

How to read the diagram:

Economical driving

If fuel consumption with the engine at

normal temperature is 28 mpg (10 l/

100 km), the actual fuel consumption

3 miles (5 km) after the engine has started

from cold will be:

– 23.5 mpg (12 l/100 km) at outside temp.

of 68°F (+20°C) (increase of 20%).

Factors affecting fuel

consumption

The fuel consumption of a car is greatly

affected by driving conditions, climate, road

conditions, speed, driving technique, etc.

– 17.7 mpg (16 l/100 km) at outside temp.

of 32°F (0°C) (increase of 60%).

– 14 mpg (20 l/100 km) at outside temp.

of –4°F (–20°C) (increase of 100%).

It is clear from the diagram that both dis-

tance driven and outside temperature have

a significant impact on fuel consumption,

after a cold start.

If the car is normally driven on short jour-

neys, 3–5 miles (5–8 km), for example to

and from work, the average consumption

will be 60–80% above the normal level.

Breaking-in

Fuel consumption may be somewhat

higher during the break-in period (the

first 3,000–4,000 miles (5,000–7,000 km)).

Weather conditions

Percentage increase in fuel consumption

of engine starting from cold compared to

engine at normal temperature.

Summer temperatures give better fuel

economy than winter ones. The difference

can be as much as about 10%. Consump-

tion increases in cold weather because the

engine takes longer to reach its normal

operating temperature. The transmission

and wheel bearings also take longer to

warm up. Even distance affects consump-

tion: short journeys of 3–5 miles (5–8 km)

do not give the engine enough time to

reach its optimum temperature. Wind con-

ditions also have a marked effect on fuel

consumption.

Driving techniques

• To obtain the best running economy, with

regard to fuel consumption and general

wear, the car must be serviced regularly.

• High speed, unnecessary acceleration,

frequent braking and much changing

down all give higher fuel consumption.

• Frequent gear changing in traffic, starting

in cold weather, the use of studded tires

and roof racks, and towing a camper all

increase fuel consumption.

• Do not warm up the engine while the car

is stationary.

If idling, the engine will take much longer

to reach its optimum temperature, and

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

194

Starting and driving

engine wear is at its greatest during this

period. Drive off as soon as possible after

starting the engine and avoid high engine

speeds.

• Drive as smoothly and thoughtfully as

possible. Match your driving to the prevail-

ing traffic conditions.

• Driving in a low gear gives rise to higher

fuel consumption than driving in a high

gear because of the higher engine speed

for any given road speed. Always shift up

as soon as traffic conditions allow and

drive in the highest gear as much as

possible.

• Check the tire pressure once a month.

Incorrect tire pressure increases tire

wear. It is preferable for the tire pressure

to be slightly high than too low. Under-

pressure increases fuel consumption.

• Check the fuel consumption regularly.

Increased fuel consumption can indicate

that something is wrong and that the car

needs to be checked. We recommend

that you contact a Saab dealer.

Practicalroadtestshavedemonstratedthat

substantial savings in fuel consumption can

be made if the above advice is followed.

Engine block heater 3

The following are just some of the benefits

to the car and the environment of using an

engine block heater:

• Lower fuel consumption.

• Reduced wear on the engine.

• Inside of car warms up faster.

• Exhaust emissions substantially reduced

over short runs.

The engine heater is effective at outside

temperatures up to 60–70°F (+15–+20°C).

Thewarmeritisoutside,theshorterthetime

the engine heater needs to be connected.

Longer than 1.5 hours is unnecessary.

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while driving

as the effect of the brakes and power

steering will be greatly reduced.

If the car is equipped with a removable,

electric cabin heater that is not in use, store

this in the trunk.

Road conditions

Wetroadsincreasefuelconsumption, asdo

unpaved roads and driving in hilly country

(the amount of fuel saved driving downhill is

less than the additional amount required to

climb the hill).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 195

Condensation is caused by temperature

fluctuations, either in the outside temper-

ature alone or when the car is alternately

parked outdoors and in a garage.

Driving in cold weather

In cold weather, special attention should be

paid to the following:

• Convertible: Avoid operating the soft top

• Before driving off, make sure that the

wiper blades have not frozen to the wind-

shield.

• Remove any snow from the heating

system air intakes between the hood and

the windshield.

• If necessary, inject oil into the locks to

prevent them from freezing. Use molyb-

denum-sulphide oil (MoS₂). If the locks

freeze, exercise care when unlocking the

car (manual unlocking) to avoid breaking

the key. Warm up the key or use a de-icer.

• It is particularly important when the roads

are slippery that the brakes and tires are

in good condition.

at temperatures below 23°F (–5°C).

• The car is equipped with tires designed to

provide optimum grip on both wet and dry

roads, althoughthis has been achievedat

theexpenseofsomewhatreducedgripon

snow and ice. For regular driving on snow

and ice, we therefore recommend that

winter tires be fitted. However, winter tires

achieve this extra grip at the expense of

grip on bare road surfaces.

Winter tires, particularly studded tires, gen-

erally make driving safer on snow and ice.

Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-

sions governing the use of different

types of winter tires and snow chains.

Studded tires are not allowed in some

countries.If winter tiresarefitted, thesame

type must be fitted to all four wheels. Your

Saabdealerwillbepleasedtoadviseyouon

the best tires for your car.

• For how to check the level of antifreeze in

the engine coolant, see page 222.

• Add gasoline anti-freeze when refueling

several times before the onset of winter.

This will prevent condensation water in

the fuel tank from freezing and causing

interruptions in the fuel supply. The likeli-

hood of condensation is lowest when the

fuel tank is full.

If the car is parked outside and the

temperature is below zero, gasoline anti-

freeze is of little use as it cannot remove

water that has already frozen. Park the

car in a warm place so that any ice that

may have built up melts, then add gaso-

line anti-freeze when refueling.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

196

Starting and driving

Remember that tires age: it may therefore

be necessary to change winter tires before

they reach the legal wear limit, as they grad-

ually lose their friction properties with age.

Driving with tire chains 3

Snowchainsmustonlybefittedtothewheel

andtiredimensions thatSaabrecommends

in "Technical data" on page 293.

If you get into a front wheel skid and the car

has a manual transmission, the best

response is to freewheel, which means

declutching so that the wheels neither drive

nor brake, and to cautiously steer in the

desired direction.

We recommend that you contact a Saab

dealer regarding approved tire chains. See

also page 263.

WARNING

If the car has automatic transmission, ease

off the accelerator slightly and steer cau-

tiously in the desired direction.

• Do not drive at speeds above 30 mph

(50 km/h) when tire chains are fitted.

If you get into a rear wheel skid, steer in the

same direction as the movement of the rear

of the car.

• Tire chains can reduce directional

stability.

• Do not fit tire chains to the car’s rear

wheels.

NOTICE

• Check the links frequently for wear.

• Check that the chains do not foul the

wheel arch liner at full lock.

• Refer to the "Technical data" section

on page 293, for information on wheel

and tire dimensions approved for the

fitting of tire chains.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 197

2 If the engine is idling and the needle on

the temperature gauge falls, wait until a

normal temperature is shown (about in

the middle of the scale) before switching

off the engine. If the coolant needs to be

topped up, carefully unscrew the

expansion tank cap.

Fill as required with a mixture of 50 %

antifreezeand50 %cleanwater.Usean

antifreeze approved by Saab.

Driving in hot climates

Always check the coolant level before start-

ing a journey. When the engine is cold, the

coolant must not lie above the KALT/COLD

mark on the expansion tank (boundary

betweentheupperandlowersectionsofthe

tank).

At the end of a journey, allow the engine to

idle for 2–3 minutes before switching it off.

If the needle on the temperature gauge

enters the red zone, the following message

will be shown on the SID:

WARNING

• Exercise care when opening the hood

if the engine is overheated. Never

remove the expansion tank cap

Hot engine.

Make a safe stop.

Run engine on idle.

completely when the engine is hot.

1 Stop the car but do not switch off the

engine. Do not remove the cap on the

cooling system expansion tank, even if

the tank is empty. The engine tempera-

tureshoulddecrease. Ifthetemperature

continues to rise with the engine idling,

the engine must be switched off.

• The cooling system is pressurized -

hot coolant and vapour can escape.

These can cause injury to your eyes

and burns. Open the cap slowly to

release the pressure before removing

it.

3 Have the car’s cooling system checked.

WerecommendthatyoucontactaSaab

dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

198

Starting and driving

Trailer hitch attachment 3

Towing a trailer 3

Trailer hitch attachments are available as

accessories. These are designed for a max-

imum trailer weight of 3500 lbs (1588 kg),

with trailer brakes.

WARNING

• Do not drive with a trailer on inclines

steeper than 15 %. The load on the

drive (front) wheels will be so low that

the wheels can start to spin and

prevent further progress.

An electrical connection 3 for the towbar

and an electrical unit are provided in the

electrical centre on the left-hand side of the

luggage compartment.

TheSaabgenuineelectricalsocketenables

a battery in the trailer on tow to be charged

while driving. Also, if the car has SPA, this

is deactivated automatically if a trailer is

hitched up and correctly connected to the

Saab genuine trailer socket.

• In addition, the car’s parking brake

may not always be sufficient to hold

the car and trailer securely, as the

wheels may start to slide.

• Always apply the trailer’s parking

brake when unhitching it. There is

otherwise a risk of personal injury or

damage to the bumper should the

trailer start to roll.

Saab recommendations:

• Use a genuine Saab trailer hitch that is

designed and tested for your Saab.

• Contact your Saab dealer for advice on

which trailer hitch is designed for your car.

• When you hitch up the trailer be sure

to attach its safety chains to the holes

by the hitch.

Make sure you are familiar with the legal

requirements regarding speed limits for

towing, maximum trailer weights, trailer

braking requirements, and also any spe-

cial driving licence provisions.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 199

The following driving time limits are based

on the capacity of the cooling system in hot

weather, i.e. approximately 104°F (+40°C).

The following message will be displayed on

the SID if the transmission fluid becomes

too hot:

NOTICE

• We recommend you to use a genuine

Saab trailer hitch, since other models

can damage the car’s bodywork and

electrical system.

Gradient of Max. trailer Time limit,

Gearbox too hot.

Make a safe stop.

Open hood to cool down.

hill, %

weight, lbs. minutes

(kg)

6-8

2200 (1000) unlimited

1760 (800) max. 15

1100 (500) max. 15

880 (400) max. 15

• We recommend that you contact a

Saab dealer for guidance on how to

connect a trailer hitch.

If this message appears, stop the car as

soon as it is safe to do so and allow the

engine to idle until the message has gone

out. The selector lever should be in

position P.

When continuing your journey, manually

select a low gear in which the engine speed

is about 3,500 rpm until the incline eases

(see page 178).

9-11

12-14

max. 15

• Exercise carewhen drivingonuneven

roads or against the curb if the car is

heavilyladen. Thisparticularlyapplies

to cars with 17" wheels.

When negotiating long hills, bear the follow-

ing important considerations in mind.

Rises in coolant temperature are indicated

bythetemperature gauge in the main instru-

ment panel.

Recommendations for cars with

automatic transmission

The following driving time limits are based

on the capacity of the cooling system in hot

weather, i.e. approximately 86°F (+30°C).

WARNING

Thefollowingstepsaretakeninorderasthe

temperature of the transmission increases:

Remember to use engine-braking (selec-

tor position M1, M2, or M3) to spare the

brakes when you are driving on a long or

steep downhill slope.

• Gear change pattern is altered

• A/C compressor is switched off

• Max. engine torque is reduced

Gradient of Max. trailer Time limit,

hill, %

weight, lbs. minutes

(kg)

Overheating can cause the brakes to

fade!

6-8

3330 (1500) unlimited

3080 (1400) max. 15

2645 (1200) max. 15

2200 (1000) max. 15

9-11

12-14

max. 15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

200

Starting and driving

Recommendations for cars with

manual transmission

Rises in coolant temperature are indicated

by the temperaturegaugeinthemaininstru-

ment panel.

When the needle is just outside the red

zone, the A/C compressor will be switched

off and, on certain engine variants, the max-

imum engine torque will be limited.

When continuing your journey, select a low

gear in which the engine speed is about

3,500 rpm until the incline eases.

Trailer hitch load

The weight distribution on the trailer makes

a lot of difference to the handling properties

of the car and trailer combination. With a

two-wheel trailer, concentrate the load over

the wheels and keep it as low as possible.

The trailer should be loaded so that the load

on the towball is 110–165 lbs. (50–75 kg).

Note that this load must be included in the

total load for the car. If this now exceeds the

specified load capacity, the load in the trunk

may have to be reduced by the correspond-

ing amount.

Distribution of load in trailer

WARNING

a Light

Remember to use engine-braking (selec-

tor position 1, 2, or 3) to spare the brakes

when you are driving on a long or steep

downhill slope.

b Moderate

c Heavy

Overheating can cause the brakes to

fade!

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 201

Checks before driving

Driving considerations

Reversing

Make sure that the car and trailer are in

good working order. This is essential since

towing a trailer increases the strain on the

car.

Always take extra care when towing a

trailer, as the car’s handling will be different

and its braking performance reduced. The

trailer’s braking system and suspension

also have a considerable effect on these

characteristics. See also "Driving with a

load" on page 204.

Get someone to help you keep an eye out

behind the trailer as the door mirrors do not

always provide sufficient rearward vision

when reversing.

• Check and if necessary adjust the tire

pressure of the car and trailer.

• Make sure all wheel bolts are properly

tightened.

Drive carefully:

• descending hills

• on uneven roads

• over railway crossings

• when meeting large vehicles

Ifthecarhasautomatic transmission, select

gear M1 when ascending or descending

steep hills.

• Make sure that the equipment joining the

car and trailer is properly secured and

adjusted.

• Make sure the trailer’s electrical cable is

properlyconnectedandisnotsolongthat

it dragsalongtheground. Also, makesure

the cable is not too short and risks break-

ing when turning a corner.

• Check all bulbs.

• Check the car and trailer brakes.

• Make sure that all items on or in the

camper or trailer are properly secured.

• Makesurethatthetrailer’sjockeywheelis

raised and locked.

• Check the distribution of the load so that

the car and trailer are well balanced.

• Check that the rearview mirrors provide

the best possible rearward vision.

• Make sure the trailer’s safety cable is

correctly attached.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

202

Starting and driving

Fitting roof carriers 3

Driving with a roof rack

load

Sport Sedan and SportCombi without

roof rails

1 Open the four covers on the roof of the

car.

WARNING

2 Insertascrewwithwasherintoeachroof

carrier foot. Fit a seal onto each screw.

3 The roof carriers are marked front and

back.

• A roof load will affect the car’s center

of gravity and aerodynamics. Be

aware of this when cornering and driv-

ing in crosswinds.

4 Bolt the roof carriers to the brackets in

the roof.

5 Check that the roof carriers are firmly

mounted.

• Adjust your speed to the prevailing

conditions.

• Duetohigheraerodynamicsdrag, fuel

economymaysufferwhendrivingwith

a roof rack.

Mounting holes for roof carrier

The maximum permissible roof load is

220 lbs. (100 kg). Note that the roof load

must be included in the car’s maximum per-

missible payload and axle load.

Strong, sturdy roof carriers designed spe-

cially for your car are available from your

Saab dealer. Always secure roof loads

securely.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 203

Fitting roof carriers 3

SportCombi with roof rails

1 Clean the car’s roof rails.

2 Check the markings on the cross

members to see which is the front and

which is the rear roof carrier.

3 Place the cross members on the roof

rails, on their respective sides of the

centre supports. The cross members

must not be placed beyond the front or

rear joint on the rail. Ensure that the

distance between the cross members is

at least 700 mm.

If a roof box is to be fitted, the cross

members must be positionedso that the

tailgate can be opened fully without

hitting the roof box.

4 Using your thumb, press the bracket

so that it lies snugly against the

outside of the roof rail. Make sure that

the roof carriers are seated centrally on

the rubber spacers and that these sit

correctlyontheroofrail.Pullthespacers

down slightly on the inside of the roof

rail.

5 Centre the roof carriers so that they

protrude equally on both sides.

6 Tighten the roof carriers by hand.

Ensure that the tightening knobs are

upright once the roof carriers have been

tightened.

7 Make sure the roof carriers are securely

in place.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

204

Starting and driving

Driving with a load

Thehandlingcharacteristicsareaffectedby

how the car is loaded.

Drivingwiththetrunklid Driving in deep water

open

NOTICE

Do not drive in puddles or water deeper

than 7 in. (20 cm) and do not drive faster

than 3–4 mph. Water can otherwise be

suckedintotheengine. Theenginewillbe

seriously damaged if water enters the

intake system.

WARNING

NOTICE

Avoid driving with the trunk lid partly or

fully open, since exhaust fumes can be

drawn into the cabin.

• Place the heaviest load as far forward

and as low as possible in the trunk.

• Secure the load to the lashing eyes

(see page 149).

If you must drive with the trunk lid open,

close all windows and the sunroof (if

equipped) and set the cabin fan to its high-

est speed setting.

• Heavy loads mean that the car’s

center of gravity is further back. As a

result, the car will sway more during

evasive steering.

• Never exceed the permissible load of

the roof box, even if there is room for

more.

• Ensure that the tire pressure is correct

– slight overinflation is preferable to

underinflation.

• Thebrakingdistanceofaloadedcaris

always greater. Keep your distance

from the vehicle in front.

• Do not exceed the car’s permissible

gross vehicle weight or axle load (see

page 294).

• Roof loads can negatively affect tele-

communication.

For further information on tires see

page 256.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 205

Front towing eye

Driving at night

Bear in mind the following points, especially

when driving at night:

Towing the car

WARNING

• Nighttime driving requires your full

concentration

• Do not rush. Count on your journey taking

slightly longer.

• The number of drivers under the influence

of drugs is likely to be greater at night than

during the day.

• Do not stare at the headlights of oncom-

ing vehicles.

• Avoid driving at night if you have poor

eyesight. Night vision deteriorates with

age.

• Keep your car’s headlights, windows and

mirrors clean. Also, if you wear glasses,

make sure they are clean.

• Make sure you are well rested before

startingalongjourney.Takeabreakevery

other hour.

• Only eat light meals. Heavy meals have a

tendency to induce tiredness.

• Make sure that the towing eye is

screwed in tightly. It has a left-hand

thread!

• Remember that the brake servo does

not operate when the engine is off.

Much greater pressure than normal

will therefore be required to operate

the brake pedal.

• The towing eye is only designed for

towing the car on roads. It must not

be used to pull the car out of a ditch,

for example.

• Nor does the steering servo operate

when the engine is off. The steering

will therefore be much heavier than

usual.

• Make sure that all bystanders keep a

suitable distance, in case the towing

eye or tow rope should snap. The

towing eye or tow rope could catapult

off and cause seriously injury.

• The towing vehicle should always be

heavier than the vehicle on tow.

• Never allow passengers to ride in the

car when it is on tow.

• Never drive with the towing eye fitted

to the front bumper. Return it to its

designated storage space.

• Always seek professional help if the

car needs to be recovered.

• The ignition switch must be in the ON

position if the car is moved with the

engine not running.

• Wild animals prefer to move at dusk and

dawn.

• The steering wheel lock must be

disengaged before towing the car.

• Check the headlight levelling setting (see

page 102).

• The steering wheel lock disengages

when the remote control is inserted

into the ignition switch, if the battery

has sufficient charge.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

206

Starting and driving

Front towing eye fitted.

The towing eye has a left-hand thread!

Rear towing eye

Never use the towing eyes to pull the car

unstuck.

Rear towing eye

The car has a permanent towing eye at the

rear under the bumper.

If the car is equipped with a towbar, this can

be used instead of the towing eye.

Towing the car

NOTICE

The front towing eye is stowed by the spare

wheel. On the left-hand side of the bumper

is a cover concealing the attachment point

(tapped hole) for the towing eye.

Never use the towing eyes to pull the car

unstuck.

1 Press the knob on the upper section of

thiscover atthesame timeaspulling out

the lower edge.

2 Screw in the towing eye. The towing

Engage neutral (automatic transmission:

move the selector lever to N). Turn on the

parking lights.

Drive carefully and do not exceed the

speed limit for vehicles on tow.

eye has a left-hand thread!

3 Insert the wheel wrench into the eye to

tighten it properly.

To refit the cover: Start by inserting the top

edge of the cover. Then click in the lower

edge, one corner at a time.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 207

Always try to keep the towrope taut by

gently applying the brake of the car on tow,

as necessary. This will avoid the towrope

being jerked violently.

Transporting the car

NOTICE

If a car with sports (lowered) chassis is

transported, for example on a flat bed

truck, take extra care not to damage the

spoiler and/or underbody.

Cars with automatic transmission:

NOTICE

• The car must be towed front first.

• If the car is to be towed with the front

wheels off the ground, make sure the

parking brake is off, as this acts on the

rear wheels.

Attachment points for anchorage straps

Always observe the speed limit for vehicles

on tow. Whatever the speed limit, the car

must not be towed at speeds exceeding

30 mph (50 km/h) nor for adistance of more

than 30 miles (50 km). If the car needs to be

transported over a longer distance, a tow

truck or flatbed truck must be called out.

The engine cannot be started by towing or

pushing the car. In an emergency, the

engine can be started as described under

"Jump starting" on page 208.

Vehicle recovery

If the car has to be transported on a flatbed

truck, or similar, it must be securely

strapped down. There are attachment

points for this purpose on the underside of

the car. The attachment points are oblong

hole that have been reinforced to cope with

the stresses that arise during this type of

transport.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

208

Starting and driving

Important considerations when driving with

a compact spare tire:

Driving with the

Jump starting

compact spare tire

• The car’s ground clearance is reduced.

• Thecarmustnotbedrivenwithmorethan

one compact spare tire at a time.

• Avoid driving against the curb.

• Do not use snow chains.

• Do not fit the wheel cover - this would

conceal the warning text.

WARNING

• When working on the battery, highly

explosive gas can build up. A spark

could ignite this gas that collects

around the battery. Therefore, always

avoid sparks and open flames in the

vicinity of the battery.

• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). The

tire can overheat affecting the car’s

roadholding.

• Tire pressure: refer to page 304.

• The batterycontains corrosive sulphu-

ric acid. Always wear a face mask or

goggles when working on the battery.

• The spare tire or punctured tire must

be stowed under the trunk floor, and

secured in place with the retaining nut.

NOTICE

To avoid damaging a alloy wheel of a

punctured tire, this can be temporarily

placed outside up in the spare wheel well

but only while driving to the closest work-

shop.

• If battery acid gets into the eyes or

splashes onto skin or clothing, wash

theaffectedarealiberallywithwater. If

acid gets into the eyes or a large quan-

tity makes contact with the skin, seek

medical help.

Observe the following when the compact

spare tire is fitted:

• The compact spare is light and easy to

handle when changing a tire.

As a general rule, all heavy loads must be

well secured in the trunk (see page 149).

• Do not drive further than necessary with

the compact spare fitted - the maximum

life of the tire is only just over 2,000 miles

(approx. 3,500 km).

• Refit the standard tire as soon as possi-

ble.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 209

NOTICE

Ignoring these steps could result in costly

damage to your vehicle that would not be

covered by your warranty.

If the other system is not a 12-volt system

with a negative ground, both vehicles can

be damaged.

Trying to start your car by pushing or pull-

ing it could damage your vehicle, even if

you have a manual transmission. If you

have an automatic transmission, your

vehicle cannot be started by pushing or

pulling it.

2 Get the vehicles close enough so the

jumpercablescanreach, butbesurethe

vehicles arenot touching each other. Ifa

poor connection on the negative jumper

cable should exist, it is possible for

damage to be caused to electrical

systems/components of either vehicle

should inadvertent contact be made.

You would not be able to start your car

and bad grounding could damage the

electrical systems.

Jump starting

It is essential when a donor battery is to be

used to jump start the car that the jump

leads be connected correctly to prevent

arcing.

NOTICE

To jump start your vehicle:

If you leave your radio on, it could be

badly damaged. The repairs wouldnotbe

covered by your warranty.

1 Check the other vehicle. It must have a

12-volt battery with a negative ground

system.

WARNING

You could be injured if the vehicles roll.

Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-

cle. Put an automatic transmission in P

(Park) or a manual transmission in

Neutral.

4 Open the hood and locate the battery.

Find the positive (+) and negative (–) termi-

nals on the battery.

3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.

Turn off lights that are not needed, and

radios. This will avoid sparks and help

save both batteries and it could save

your radio.

WARNING

Anelectric fancan startupeven when the

engine is not running and can injure you.

Keephands,clothingandtoolsawayfrom

any underhood electric fan.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

210

Starting and driving

7 Do not let the other end touch metal.

Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of

the good battery. Use a remote positive

(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

8 Now connect the negative (–) cable to

the good battery’s negative terminal.

9 Attach the cable to the discharged

battery’s negative terminal.

10 Start the vehicle with the good battery

and run the engine for a while.

Using a battery charger 3 /starter

unit

WARNING

To avoid damaging the car’s electrical

system and electronics, the following rules

must be followed when charging the battery

or jump starting the car.

Using a match or flame of any kind near a

battery can cause battery gas to explode.

You can suffer burns or be blinded. Use a

flashlight if you need more light.

• If the charger or starter unit can be set to

differentvoltages(6V/12V/18V/24V),12V

must be selected.

• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions

supplied with the charger or starter unit.

• No other apparatus that are grounded or

connected to the mains must be

connected to the car during charging or

jump starting.

• The charger or starter unit must under no

conditions produce a voltage greater

than:

Besuretheelectrolyteinthebattery isnot

frozen. Discharged batteries will freeze.

When connecting jumper cables to a

frozen battery, gas from the chemical

reaction inside the battery can build up

under the ice and cause an explosion.

11 Try to start the vehicle with the

discharged battery. If it does not start

after a few tries, it probably needs

service.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn

you. Do not get it on you. If you acciden-

tally get it in your eyes or on your skin,

flush the area with water and get medical

help immediately.

Note. If the current in the low battery is

too low it might be necessary to wait

several minutes with the cables

connected before you can start the

engine with the low battery.

• 16V continuous

• 18V for 60 min.

If you are unsure about the charge rating of

the unit, disconnect the battery clamp from

the positive terminal before connecting the

unit to the battery.

12 Remove the cables in reverse order to

prevent electrical shorting. Take care

that they do not touch each other or any

other metal.

5 Check that the jumper cables do not

have loose or missing insulation. If they

do, you could get a shock and also the

vehicles could be damaged.

Before you connect the cables, here are

some basic things you should know.

Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and

negative (–) will go to negative (–). Do

not connect (+) to (–) or you will get a

short that could injure you or would

damage the battery and maybe other

parts as well.

6 Connect the red positive (+) cable to the

positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with

the discharged battery.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Starting and driving 211

For long trips

Before starting off on a long journey, it is

advisable to have your car inspected by

your Saab dealer.

Obtain a few important items to take along

on your journey, such as spare bulbs, wiper

blades, fuses, a drive belt (poly-V-belt) and

the like.

You can check some points yourself before-

hand:

• Check that no oil or fuel leaks out of the

engine or gearbox/transmission.

• Check the coolant and power steering

fluid levels. Check also for leaks.

• Inspect the drive belt (poly-V-belt) and

replace if it shows any signs of wear.

• Check the battery charge.

• Check the tires for tread pattern and air

pressure, including the compact spare

tire.

• Take an extra remote control and keep it

separate.

• Check the brakes.

• Check all bulbs.

• Check for the presence of the tool kit and

jack in the car.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

212

Starting and driving

(This page has been left blank.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 213

Car care

Hood________________

Engine ______________

Engine bay, 4-cyl engine

Engine oil ____________

Air filter______________

Transmission fluid ____

Coolant______________

214

215

217

219

222

Fuses ________________ 247

Automatic tire pressure

monitoring 3 _________ 254

Tires _________________ 256

Compact spare ________ 270

Changing a tire ________ 273

Safety belts ___________ 276

Upholstery and trim ____ 276

Textile carpeting _______ 277

Engine bay____________ 277

Washing______________ 277

Waxing and polishing___ 279

Touching up the paint___ 279

Anti-corrosion treatment 280

Brake/clutch fluid and

brake pads__________

224

225

226

229

230

232

Power steering________

Battery ______________

Drive belt ____________

Wipers and washers ___

Wiper blades _________

Changing bulbs _______

Recovery and/or

recycling of automotive

materials ____________ 282

Air conditioning (A/C)___ 282

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,

market specification, options or accessories).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

214

Car care

Hood

The hood release handle is located on the

left under the instrument panel. Open the

hood in the following way:

1 Pull the release handle.

2 The hood moves to the half-locked posi-

tion and is stopped by a safety catch at

the front edge.

3 Presstheleverofthecatchupwardsand

raise the hood.

When you close the hood you should drop it

from a height of about 12 inches (30 cm),

without slamming it.

Hood release handle

Hood release catch plate

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 215

adjusted to achieve optimum functionality.

The switches are hydraulic.

Engine

Emission control

systems

Turbo petrol engine

The engine is a transverse four-cylinder in-

line engine with twin overhead camshafts

and 16 valves.

The engine is equipped with two balance-

shafts that reduce engine vibrations to a

minimum.

The balance shafts are chain-driven and

rotate at twice the speed of the crankshaft.

They produce forces and torques that are

opposed to those generated by the pistons

and connecting rods. The effect occurs

twice in each revolution of the engine, coun-

teractingthe vibration fromitsmovingparts,

and at the same time reducing unwanted

engine noise.

Engine families

Thesystemsforcontrollingemissionstothe

atmosphere require regular checking and

adjustment at the intervals specified in the

service program.

Saab cars imported into the United States

and Canada meet all applicable emission

control standards. The engine family and

appropriate tune-up specifications are iden-

tified on a label in the engine bay.

Theseenginefamiliesmeet applicableEPA

Federal Standards, California State Stan-

dardsandCanadianFederalStandardsand

are equipped with the following systems:

In addition to meeting the exhaust emission

regulations and thereby helping to keep the

environmentclean,acorrectlytunedengine

will also give maximum fuel economy.

WARNING

• sequential multiport fuel injection system

• three way catalytic converter

• crankcase emissions control system

• evaporative emission system.

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain

or emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth

The gearbox, located on the right (viewed

from the front), is integrated with the engine.

defects and reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component wear

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Petrol engine, V6

The V6 engine is a turbocharged V6 engine

produced completely of aluminium with 60°

between the cylinder banks, 4 valves per

cylinder, 2 camshafts per bank.

The camshafts are driven via a chain trans-

mission. The engine is equipped with a

turbo whose turbine collects exhaust pres-

sure from both banks of cylinders.

To obtain optimum performance, fuel con-

sumption and low emission levels the

engine is equipped with CVCP (Continuous

Variable Cam Phasing). This means that

the engine’s intake camshafts can be

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

216

Car care

Saab Trionic engine

management system

The Saab Trionic engine management

system is a unique Saab development that

combinessequentialmultiportfuelinjection,

electronic distributorless ignition and turbo-

charger boost pressure control into one sys-

tem.

ORVR (Onboard Refueling Vapor

Recovery)

NOTICE

Allhydrocarbons formed whenrefueling will

be recovered by the car and not released

into the atmosphere. The hydrocarbons are

absorbed in an evaporative emission canis-

ter. When the engine is subsequently

started,theevaporativeemissioncanisteris

gradually purged as air is sucked into it

through a shut-off valve. The hydrocar-

bon/air mixture passes through the evap

canister purge valve and into the engine

where it is burned. “Refueling”, see

page 167.

The Trionic engine management system

continuously monitors the operation of

these systems and has on-board diag-

nostic capabilities (OBD II). If the Engine

malfunction (CHECK ENGINE) light in

the main instrument illuminates, the

TrionicECMhas detected aproblem. The

car will continue to operate, but perfor-

mance may be diminished. You should

have your car checked by a Saab dealer

as soon as possible.

The Trionic engine control module (ECM)

monitors many different engine parameters

such as:

• Intake manifold pressure.

• Intake air temperature.

When refueling, make sure you screw the

filler cap on and keep turning until it has

clicked 3 times.

• Crankshaft position.

• Engine coolant temperature.

• Throttle position.

• The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.

The ECM receives information regarding

engine knocking from a sophisticated feed-

back function in the ignition discharge unit.

By processing all of this information, the Tri-

onic system can control fuel injector open-

ing duration, ignition timing and turbo-

charger boost pressure to provide excellent

engine performance while maintaining low

emissions and fuel consumption.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 217

Engine bay, 4-cyl engine

1 Oil filler cap

2 Coolant reservoir

3 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir

4 Battery

5 Fuse box

6 Washer-fluid reservoir

7 Power-steering fluid reservoir

8 Engine-oil dipstick

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

218

Car care

Engine bay, V6 engine

1 Power-steering fluid resrvoir

2 Coolant reservoir

3 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir

4 Battery

5 Fuse box

6 Washer-fluid reservoir

7 Oil filler cap

8 Engine-oil dipstick

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 219

Engine oil

Checking the oil level

Check the engine oil level regularly.

1 Park the car on a level ground.

2 Switch off the engine and wait for

2–5 minutes. The engine should be at

normal operating temperature.

3 Take the dipstick out and wipe it off with

a clean rag before carrying out the

check.

The level must not be below the MIN mark

on the dipstick, but nor should it be above

the MAX mark. Excess engine oil could

result in abnormal oil consumption.

Oil filler cap and dipstick, 4-cyl engine

Oil filler cap and dipstick, V6 engine

The distance between the MIN and MAX

marks is equivalent to 1.0 qt (1.0 l).

2.0 Turbo (210 hk): The engine oil level is

checked each time the engine is started. If

the oil level is low, the following message

appears on the SID:

V6: The engine has an oil level sensor that

checks the oil level when the engine is

running. If the oil level drops too low, the

following message appears on the SID:

NOTICE

Too high oil level can damage the engine.

Low engine oil level.

Fill oil now.

Low engine oil level.

Fill oil now.

f this occurs the oil level must be checked

first. If the level is too low then it must be

topped up.

f this occurs the oil level must be checked

first. If the level is too low then it must be

topped up.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

220

Car care

Make sure you screw on the oil filler cap

properly after topping up the oil to avoid

running problems.

It is normal for an engine to consume a cer-

tain amount of oil. It is therefore often nec-

essary to top up the oil between services.

Check the engine oil level regularly.

Engine oil and oil filter should be changed

according to the service program.

For oil volumes and grades, refer to

page 298.

The oil should be drained when the engine

is warm. The car must stand on level

ground.

Changing engine oil

WARNING

• Prolonged and repeated exposure of

the skin to engine oil can cause seri-

ous skin disorders. Avoid prolonged

skin contact whenever possible.

During the Break-in Period (approx.

1 Unscrew the drain plug in the bottom of

the sump and leave the oil to drain into a

suitable receptacle for at least

10 minutes. Take care, as the oil may be

hot.

2 Refit the drain plug with a new washer.

3 Change the oil filter once the engine oil

has drained (see page 221).

3,000 miles or 5,000 km) and when driving

at high speeds or with a trailer, the oil con-

sumption may be higher than normal.

• Used engine oil contains chemicals

that have caused cancer in laboratory

animals. Always protect your skin by

washing thoroughly with soap and

water.

NOTICE

Change of engine oil and oil filter may be

required more frequently if the car is

being used under certain conditions, see

page 289.

• Keep oil out of reach of children.

• Do not touch the turbocharger or

exhaust manifold. These get very hot

when the engine has been running.

4 Fill with new oil.

Run the engine to normal temperature and

check the oil level.

• Do not spill oil on hot parts of the

engineasthiscouldcauseafire.Used

engine oil is particularly flammable.

• Protect the environment. Do not

dispose of oil into the ground or down

a drain. Dispose of all used oil and

oil filters at an appropriate disposal

facility.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 221

Changing filter, 4-cyl engine

1 Unscrew the oil filter cap.

• Lift the cap slightly and carefully pry

apart the cap and the filter housing.

• Remove the filter cap.

2 Remove the filter. Have paper towelling

or a rag at hand to catch the oil that

escapes from the filter.

3 Fit a new filter.

4 Fitanew O-ringinthecap. Applyasmall

amount of new engine oil to the O-ring.

5 Screwonthecap. Thecorrect tightening

torque is 25 Nm (18 lbf. ft).

Drain plug, 4-cyl engine

Drain plug, V6 engine

Oil filter, 4-cyl engine

Oil filter, V6 engine

Changing filter, V6 engine

1 Unscrew the oil filter cap. Have paper

towelling or a rag at hand to catch the oil

that escapes from the filter.

2 Remove the cap and the filter.

3 Change the O-ring in the cap. Lubricate

this with a small amount of new engine

oil.

4 Fit a new filter.

5 Screwonthecap. Thecorrect tightening

torque is 25 Nm (18 lbf ft).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

222

Car care

The coolant contains 45 % antifreeze and

anti-corrosion fluid. This ratio gives the best

coolingeffect. Lower concentrations should

be avoided, in view of the corrosion risk.

Other brands of antifreeze can damage the

engine and cooling system.

Air filter

Coolant

WARNING

To ensure reliable operation, only use

an air filter recommended by Saab

Automobile AB.

• Proceed with caution if the radiator is

boiling when you open the hood.

Never remove the expansion-tank

filler cap when the radiator is boiling.

NOTICE

If the cooling system needs topping up,

mix the antifreeze with the appropriate

quantity of drinking water or distilled

water before adding it to the system.

• The cooling system is pressurized –

hot coolant and vapor can escape

when the filler cap is released. These

can cause injury to your eyes and

burns. Loosen the cap carefully, and

let the engine cool before removing

the cap.

Transmission fluid

Manual transmission

Check and top up the oil in accordance with

the service program.

If undiluted antifreeze is added, the

enginecouldstillfreezeandbedamaged.

This is because the antifreeze will not mix

properly with the coolant before the ther-

mostat has opened to allow full circula-

tion.

Automatic transmission

Check and top up the oil in accordance with

the service program.

• Exercise care when adding coolant.

Coolant on hot surfaces constitutes a

fire risk.

Note:

If the coolant level drops too low, the follow-

ing message appears on the SID:

If incorrect coolant is used or added, the life-

time properties will be affected. Even if the

coolant is flushed from the system and

replaced with life-time coolant, life-time

properties are no longer retained and the

coolant must then be drained and replaced

at regular intervals.

Coolant level low.

Refill.

The properties of the coolant are retained

for the entire service life of the car. There-

fore, it is not necessary to change the cool-

ant.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 223

Coolant expansion tank, 4-cyl engine

Coolant expansion tank, V6 engine

Level markings, V6 engine

1 MAX

2 MIN

4-cyl engine: The expansion tank is trans-

parent to facilitate checking the coolant

level.

When the engine is cold, the coolant must

not lie above the KALT/COLD mark on the

expansion tank (boundary between the

upper and lower sections of the tank, see

illustration).

V6 engine: The expansion tank is not trans-

parent. The cap must be unscrewed so that

the coolant level can be checked. When the

cap is screwed off there are two level mark-

ings, MIN and MAX

Top up with a mixture of equal parts of anti-

freeze and clean water. We recommend

that you use a Saab-approved anti-freeze.

If the expansion tank is empty when coolant

is added, run the engine until warm so that

the thermostat opens. Top up the tank

again, as necessary.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

224

Car care

If the level drops too low, the following

message appears on the SID:

Brake/clutch fluid and

brake pads

Brake fluid level low.

Make a safe stop.

Contact Saab dealer.

WARNING

Brake fluid deteriorates as it becomes

old. Because it is hygroscopic, it absorbs

waterfromtheairand, intime, couldallow

vapor to form in the brake system, thus

reducing its performance. It is therefore

important that brake fluid be changed

regularly, as specified in the service

program.

Top up as necessary with DOT 4 brake

fluid. Do not use DOT 5 fluid.

Use only new brake fluid from a sealed

container.

The brake fluid level will fall somewhat as

the brake pads wear. The MAX level in the

reservoir corresponds to the amount of

brake fluid required with new brake pads. If

the fall in fluid level is moderate, due to

normal brake pad wear, topping up is not

necessary.

If the brake fluid should require chang-

ing, this must be carried out at a Saab

dealer. We recommend that you contact

a Saab dealer.

Brake fluid reservoir

Checking

Brake fluid should be changed according to

the service program. Refer to the Warranty

and Service Book.

The brake and clutch fluid reservoir is trans-

parent to facilitate checking of the fluid level.

The fluid level should lie between the MAX

and MIN marks.

NOTICE

Avoid spilling brake fluid onto paintwork,

since it can cause the paint to bubble and

lift. If any brake fluid is spilled, the area

should be flushed with large quantities of

water as quickly as possible.

The foot brake and parking brake are self-

adjusting.

Itisnotpossibletodetect,throughabnormal

pedal or parking brake lever travel, whether

the brake pads are worn and need replac-

ing. It is therefore essential that brake pads

be checked regularly, as specified in the

service program.

Brake pads should only be changed at a

workshop. We recommend that you con-

tact a Saab dealer. To ensure optimum

brake performance we recommend the

use of Saab genuine brake pads.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 225

Power steering

WARNING

Power steering fluid on hot engine

components constitutes a fire risk.

Check the levelof thepowersteeringfluidin

the reservoir regularly, in accordance with

the service program.

The wheels should point directly forwards

during this check.

Clean round the cap before unscrewing it.

Wipe the dipstick. To check the level, screw

down the cap completely and then remove

it again.

Power steering fluid reservoir, 4-cyl

engine

Power steering fluid reservoir, V6 engine

The oil level should lie between the MAX

and MIN marks when the oil temperature is

about 68°F (+20°C). If the oil is colder, the

level will be lower, and at a higher tempera-

tures the level will be higher.

Top up with CHF 11S or CHF 202 power

steering fluid.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

226

Car care

If frequent short journeys are made, the

battery may need extra charging. This can

be done with a battery charger or by taking

the car for a long run.

If the battery is not being charged while the

engine is running, the following message

will appear on the SID:

Battery

WARNING

• When working on the battery, highly

explosive gas can build up. A spark

could ignite this gas that collects

around the battery.

Therefore, always avoid sparks and

open flames in the vicinity of the

battery.

Battery not charging.

Make a safe stop.

Contact Saab dealer.

Check the drive belt (see page 229). If the

belt is damaged, the engine may overheat,

the battery may not be charged and the A/C

compressor may not work.

• The batterycontains corrosive sulphu-

ric acid. Always wear a face mask or

goggles when working on the battery.

Checking the battery electrolyte level.

Level correct if level indicator dark.

Battery should be changed if indicator is

light

• If battery acid gets into the eyes or

splashes onto skin or clothing, wash

the affected area liberally with water.

If acid gets into the eyes or a large

quantity makes contact with the skin,

seek medical help.

Check thechargestateandelectrolytelevel

of the battery regularly.

• Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash your hands after

handling

NOTICE

A discharged battery can freeze and frac-

ture.Batteriesshouldthereforealwaysbe

stored away from sub-zero temperatures.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 227

Always connect the positive (red) cable to

the battery’s positive (+) terminal, and the

negative (black) cable to the negative (-)

terminal of the battery. Always disconnect

both battery leads when boost charging the

battery.

NOTICE

• If boost charging never use anything

but a 12-volt charger, see page 208.

• Do not connect the battery termi-

nals, + and –, incorrectly.

Turn the two retainers a quarter turn to

unlock the battery cover.

Battery bracket

• Serious damagecanoccur to the car’s

electricalsystem ifabattery oralterna-

tor lead is disconnected while the

engine is running.

• Exercise special care when removing

and fitting the positive (+) cable so as

not to damage the battery disconnect

switch.

A car with standard equipment specifica-

tions and a fully charged battery can be left

for up to 40 days and still have a sufficient

charge for starting. If extra equipment is fit-

ted, such as a mobile phone, the charge

may only be sufficient for about 15 days.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

228

Car care

Battery disconnect switch 3

WARNING

If the battery disconnect switch has

tripped, do not reset it until you have visu-

ally inspected the car’s electrical system.

If there are visible signs of damage, have

the car checked at a workshop before

resetting the disconnect switch. We

recommend that you contact an author-

ised Saab workshop.

Battery disconnect switch with reset

button

A collision could cause a short circuit in the

alternator or starter motor. A disconnect

switchbythebattery’spositiveterminalcuts

offthebatteryfromthealternatorandstarter

motor when the airbags and seatbelt pre-

tensioners are detonated.

NOTICE

Exercisespecialcarewhenremovingand

fitting the positive (+) cable so as not to

damage the battery disconnect switch.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 229

Drive belt

WARNING

• Keephands and clothingclearofdrive

belts when engine is running.

• Always stop the engine before

inspecting the drive belt.

• The radiator fan is electric and can

start even when the engine is

switched off.

Drive belt

NOTICE

A slipping or broken poly-V-belt can

result in:

Serious damage can be done to the car’s

electrical system if an alternator lead is

disconnected while the engine is running.

• no charge to the battery

• no A/C compressor function.

The belt tension is critical and is adjusted

automatically by the belt tensioner.

The alternator is situated on the right-hand

side of the engine. It is driven by a

poly-V-belt from the crankshaft pulley.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

230

Car care

Wipers and washers

Wiper blades

Check and clean all wiper blades regularly.

If poor wiper performance is experienced,

clean the windshield with washer fluid. This

is particularly important if the car has been

through an automatic car wash, as these

sometimes leave a wax coating on the wind-

shield.

If wiper performance is still unsatisfactory,

fit new blades.

Change of wiper blades, windshield

Change of wiper blades, rear window,

SportCombi

Windshield

Rear window, SportCombi

1 Press in the catch (1).

1 Detach the blade from the arm by press-

ing on the mounting for the blade from

below.

2 Fit the new blade by pressing the shaft

of the blade into the arm's mounting.

2 Pull the complete wiper blade down-

wards so that it comes away from the

wiper arm. Slide the entire blade out

from the arm.

The washer jet, which is located next to the

high-mounted brake light, is not adjustable.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 231

Washers

WARNING

Takecare not tospillwasher fluidconcen-

trate onto hot surfaces. Washer fluid

concentrate can contain flammable ingre-

dients such as alcohol.

The reservoir capacity is approx. 6 qts.

(5.8 litres).

When the washer fluid level drops below

1 quart (1 litre), the headlight washers (if

equipped) are deactivated. This is in order

to prioritize the windshield. The following

message is displayed on the SID:

Washer fluid reservoir

Washer jets

The washer jets, which are adjustable, can

be cleaned with a pin if necessary.

To prevent the smell of washer fluid from

entering the car, recirculation can be acti-

vated automatically while the windshield is

washed. The recirculation symbol will

however not light up. This function is

optional; contact a workshop. We recom-

mend that you contact a Saab dealer.

Washer fluid level low.

Refill.

Headlight washers are only available on

certain markets.

Fill with a mixture of washer fluid and water

as recommended by the table on

the packaging to reduce the risk of freezing

and to ensure effective cleaning (see also

page 106).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 232

If a stop light bulb fails

Changing bulbs

Sport Sedan: If a stop light bulb fails, the adjacent taillight will act

as a stop light to ensure traffic safety. Change the broken bulb when

possible.

All rear light bulbs are of the same type and rated 21 W, with the

exception of the license plate lighting which is rated 5 W.

WARNING

Before changing a bulb in the engine bay, switch off the engine

to avoid the danger of fingers and hands being injured by moving

parts.

Wrong bulb fitted

If a dipped or main beam bulb of too high a rating is fitted, a bulb

failure message will be shown on the SID (a too high wattage bulb

can damage the reflector).

The radiator fan can cut in even when the engine is switched off.

If the following message is displayed but the bulb shines, it is most

likely that an incorrect bulb has been fitted.

NOTICE

Switch off the ignition before changing a bulb, to avoid possible

short-circuiting.

Right high beam failure.

Autochecking of lights

The bulbs that are most important from the point of view of traffic

safety are monitored by the car’s electrical system. If one of these

bulbs should fail, a message will be displayed on the SID.

Note:

When changing bulbs, fit the same type of bulb (e.g. Long-Life)

as that removed.

Example of SID message:

Headlight aiming, page 283.

Left low beam failure.

The following bulbs are not checked: parking lights, front fog lights,

reversing lights, license plate lighting, side marker lights and side

direction indicators.

SportCombi

The tail lights and brake lights consist of LEDs. If approx. 3/4 of the

LEDs on one side are broken then this is indicated in the SID.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

233

Car care

Xenon headlight, dipped beam 3

WARNING

Xenon headlights are high tension. All work on xenon headlights,

including changing bulbs, must be carried out by dealer person-

nel.

Xenon headlights produce roughly two times as much light as halo-

gen bulbs and have a significantly longer service life.

The lamp units consist of a gas discharge lamp containing xenon.

When the lights are switched on a very high voltage activates the

xenon gas. The lamps soon reach full intensity.

We recommend you to contact a Saab

dealer to have a xenon headlight changed

Cars with xenon headlights have automatic levelling. The levelling

system is comprised of two sensors, one on the front suspension

and one on the rear suspension, and acontrolunit by theenginebay

fuse box. Headlight alignment is adjusted automatically to the car’s

load to prevent dazzling drivers in oncoming traffic.

If a fault is detected in the system, the following message will be dis-

played on the SID:

Headlight levelling

malfunction.

Contact Saab dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 234

Retainers on the battery cover

Changing the low beam bulb

4 Refit the cover over the rear of the headlight.

Low beam, halogen

Left-hand side

1 Lift aside the hose running along the side of the battery cover.

2 Release the two retainers (a quarter of a turn counterclockwise)

in the leading edge of the cover and remove the cover.

5 Refit the air pipe to the front of the battery box.

6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.

7 Refit the battery cover.

3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.

4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge of the battery box.

5 Pull up the fuse panel in front of the battery (certain variants),

see page 253.

NOTICE

Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W as this could

damage the headlight reflector. Furthermore, the car’s wiring is

not designed to cope with higher wattages.

Both sides

1 Remove the cover from the rear of the headlight.

2 Twist the bulb holder counterclockwise and withdraw the holder

from the reflector.

3 Change the bulb without touching the glass with your fingers.

Insert the bulb holder into the reflector and twist it clockwise until

it locks.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

235

Car care

Retainers on the battery cover

Changing the high beam bulb

4 Refit the cover over the rear of the headlight.

High beam, halogen

Left-hand side

1 Lift aside the hose running along the side of the battery cover.

2 Release the two retainers (a quarter of a turn counterclockwise)

in the leading edge of the cover and remove the cover.

5 Refit the air pipe to the front of the battery box.

6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.

7 Refit the battery cover.

3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.

4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge of the battery box.

5 Pull up the fuse panel in front of the battery (certain variants),

see page 253.

NOTICE

Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W as this could

damage the headlight reflector. Furthermore, the car’s wiring is

not designed to cope with higher wattages.

Both sides

1 Remove the cover from the rear of the headlight.

2 Twist the bulb holder counterclockwise and withdraw the holder

from the reflector.

3 Change the bulb without touching the glass with your fingers.

Insert the bulb holder into the reflector and twist it clockwise until

it locks.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

236

Car care

Both sides:

1 Remove the cover from the rear of the

headlight.

2 Withdraw the bulb holder from the lamp

unit.

3 Fit the new bulb.

4 Refit the cover over the rear of the head-

light.

Left-hand side:

5 Refit the air pipe to the front edge of the

battery box.

6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.

7 Refit the battery cover and hose.

Parking lights

The parking light bulb is located in the same

reflector as the main beam bulb.

Front turn signal bulbs

Left-hand side:

1 Lift aside the hose running along the

side of the battery cover.

2 Release the two retainers on the battery

cover and remove the cover.

3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.

4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge

of the battery box.

Left-hand side:

1 Lift aside the hose running along the

side of the battery cover.

2 Release the two retainers on the battery

cover and remove the cover.

3 Pull up the washer fluid filler pipe.

4 Remove the air pipe from the front edge

of the battery box.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 237

Both sides:

Side-mounted turn signal bulbs

1 The bulb holder has a bayonet fitting.

Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise

and withdraw it.

2 The bulb also has a bayonet fitting.

Press in the bulb and twist it counter-

clockwise.

1 Slide the lamp fitting forward so that its

rear end can be pulled out.

2 Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise

and withdraw it from the lamp fitting.

Change the bulb.

3 To fit, engage the two catches on the

rear edge of the lamp fitting with the

edge of the opening. Then press in the

front edge of the lamp fitting so that the

groove in the spring engages the plastic

edge.

3 Fit the new bulb.

4 To facilitate fitting, look in through the

headlight lens when fitting the bulb.

Check that the new bulb is firmly seated.

Left-hand side:

5 Refit the air pipe to the front edge of the

battery box.

6 Refit the washer fluid filler pipe.

7 Refit the battery cover and hose.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

238

Car care

1 Undo one screw in the wheel housing.

Lower the air shield.

2 Remove the protective cover. Release

the two spring clips securing the bulb.

3 Unplug the connector.

4 Change the bulb. Try not to touch the

glass part of the bulb with your fingers.

The height of the beam can be adjusted

using a screwdriver inserted through the

hole in the lower grille adjacent to the lens.

Front fog lights 3

WARNING

Side marker lights

1 Slide the lens rearward so that its front

part can be pulled out.

2 Fit the new bulb.

• Never crawl under a car that is

supported only by a jack. Always use

axle stands.

3 When refitting, make sure that the

groove in the spring engages the plastic

edge of the bumper trim.

• Refer to the information on jacks on

pages 273 and 274.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 239

Taillights, Sport Sedan

1 Turn signals

2 Taillights/stop lights

3 Reversing lights

Taillights, Convertible

1 Turn signals

2 Taillights/stop lights

3 Reversing lights

Taillights, SportCombi

1 Turn signals

2 Taillights/stop lights

3 Reversing lights

4 Rear fog light (left-hand side)

5 High-mounted stop light

4 Rear fog light (left-hand side)

5 High-mounted stop light

4 Rear fog light (left-hand side)

5 High-mounted stop light

Sport Sedan: If a stop light bulb fails, the

adjacent taillight will act as a stop light to

ensure traffic safety. Change the broken

bulb when possible.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

240

Car care

Stop lights, taillights and turn

signal bulbs, Sport Sedan

Stop lights, taillights and turn

signal bulbs, Convertible

Turn signals, reversing light and

rear fog light, SportCombi

1 Lower the cover in the trim behind the

lights.

Right-hand side: Unlock the plastic rivet

by depressing the centre no more than

3 mm. Take hold of the collar of the rivet

and pull it out. Refer also to page 241.

1 Remove the cover.

2 Carefully remove the bulb holder with

the broken bulb.The bulb holder has a

bayonet fitting.

3 Change the bulb.

4 Refit the bulb holder and cover.

2 Remove the bulb holder with the broken

bulb. The bulb holder has a bayonet

fitting.

3 Fit the new bulb.

4 Refit the bulb holder and the cover.

2 Lift the plastic lug on the lamp housing

that secures the bulb holder.

3 Carefully remove the entire bulb holder

unit from the lamp housing. Change the

bulb.

4 Refit the bulb holder. Press the bulb

holder home so that the plastic lug

snaps into place.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 241

Changing bulbs

Reversing lights and rear fog

light, Sport Sedan

Reversing lights and rear fog

lights, Convertible

1 Press down the plastic lug on the bulb

holder.

2 Carefully remove the entire bulb holder

unit from the lamp housing. Change the

bulb.

3 Refit the bulb holder. Press the lug so

that it snaps into place.

To refit the trunk lid trim

Removing the trunk lid trim

1 Remove the two screws securing the

grab handle to the inside of the trunk lid.

2 Unlock the plastic rivets by pressing in

the center of each rivet. Pull out the

rivets by taking hold of the rivet’s collar.

You can use the button on the handle of the

screwdriver supplied with the car to unlock

the rivets.

1 Remove the two screws securing the

grab handle to the inside of the trunklid.

2 Unlock the plastic rivets by pressing in

the centre of each rivet no more than

3 mm. Pull out the rivets by taking hold

of the rivet’s collar.

You can use the button on the handle of the

screwdriver supplied with the car to unlock

the rivets.

1 Withdraw the center of the rivets.

2 Fit the trim in place on the trunk lid.

3 Fit the rivets. Lock the rivets in place by

pressing the center buttons in until flush

with the collar.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

242

Car care

Changing bulbs

Dome light, front, Sport Sedan

and SportCombi

1 Pull down the rear edge of the lens.

2 Fit the new bulb.

3 Insert the guide lugs onthe front edgeof

the lens and press the lens home.

Dome light, rear, Sport Sedan

and SportCombi

1 Remove the entire overhead panel:

ease out the trailing end first, and then

both sides of the front edge.

1 Carefully remove the bulb holder with

the broken bulb. The bulb holder has a

bayonet fitting.

2 Fit the new bulb.

3 Refit the bulb holder.

To refit the trunk lid trim

2 Fit the new bulb.

1 Withdraw the centre of the rivets.

2 Fit the trim in place on the trunk lid.

3 Fit the rivets. Lock the rivets in place by

pressing the center buttons in until flush

with the collar.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 243

Hatch opened for replacement of centre

bulb

Reverse side of the light fitting. The

arrows mark the outer bulbs

Dome light, Convertible

1 Pull down the rear edge of the light

fitting.

2 If the center bulb needs replacing, open

the hatch over the bulbs. Pull the bulb

out of the bulb holder.

Ifoneoftheouterbulbsneedsreplacing,

turn the light fitting round. Change the

bulb from the reverse of the lighting

fitting. The bulb has a bayonet fitting.

3 Position the front edge of the light fitting

and press the fitting up towards the

windscreen rail.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

244

Car care

License plate lighting

1 Undo the two screws and remove the

lens.

Glove box lighting 3

1 Remove the lamp housing using a short

screwdriver.

Trunk lighting, Sport Sedan

The lamp fitting is located under the parcel

shelf.

2 Fit the new bulb.

3 Make sure the seal on the lens is

correctly seated.

2 Fit the new bulb.

3 Insert the connector side first when refit-

ting the lamp.

1 Remove the lamp fitting by pulling down

one end.

2 Fit the new bulb.

4 Refit the lens and tighten the two

screws.

3 Insert the connector side first when refit-

ting the lamp.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 245

Trunk lighting, Convertible

Trunk lighting, SportCombi

Courtesy/floor lighting 3

1 Remove the lamp in the rear end first.

2 Change the bulb.

3 Insert the connector side first when refit-

ting the lamp.

1 Pull the lamp housing forward and lift it

out at the front.

2 Fit the new bulb. The bulb is secured in

the holder.

3 Start by inserting in the front edge of the

lamp housing and then pressing in the

rear edge.

1 Release one edge of the lamp fitting

using a screwdriver.

2 Fit the new bulb.

3 Insert the connector side first when refit-

ting the lamp.

Other bulbs

If any other bulbs need changing, we rec-

ommend that you visit a Saab dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

246

Car care

Bulb table

No. Designation Watt-

age

55 Headlight

55 Front fog lights 3

P21W

21 Taillights; rear fog light; brake lights;

reversing lights

PY21W

R10W

21 Direction indicator, front/rear

10 Rear dome lighting; courtesy

lighting 3 ; glove box lighting; trunk

lighting, Convertible

R5W

License plate lighting; trunk lighting,

Sport Sedan

T4W

Reading light, rear

WY5W/W5W

Side-mounted turn signal (yellow);

parking lights; front dome lighting

NOTICE

Only fit lamps of the specified rating. Lamps of the wrong wattage

could damage the wiring harness and electronics.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 247

The fuses are housed in three fuse panels:

one behind a hatch on the left-hand end of

the dash, one in the engine bay (additional

small unit in front of battery) and one on the

left-hand side of the trunk. There is space

for spare fuses in the hatch on the left-hand

end of the dash.

Fuses

WARNING

To avoid the risk of short-circuiting and/or

fire breaking out in the electrical system,

the following should be heeded:

• We recommend that you allways

consult an Saab dealer before modify-

ing or adding any electrical equip-

ment. Failure to do so can result in the

electrical system being damaged.

Sound fuse / Blown fuse

To check if a fuse has blown, first remove it

from the panel. If the filament is broken, the

fuse has blown.

• Never replace a fuse with one having

a higher rating than specified (see

page 249). The color of the fuse indi-

cates its amperage.

• If the same fuse blows repeatedly,

have the electrical system checked by

a workshop. We recommend that you

contact a Saab dealer.

• If a MAXI fuse blows, it means that

there is a major fault in the electrical

system. Have the car checked without

delay. We recommend that you

contact a Saab dealer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

248

Car care

Some fuses and relays may be fitted but not

connected to the car’s electrical system.

MAXI fuses

The car also has a number of large fuses

known as MAXI fuses. These are designed

to protect the car’s electrical system from

being damaged. Each MAXI fuse protects a

number of electrical circuits and functions

and therefore has a higher rating (amper-

age) than the standard fuses. No spare

MAXI fuses are supplied with the car.

NOTICE

Ifa MAXI fuseblows, there is amajor fault

in the electrical system. Have the car

checked. We recommend that you

contact a Saab dealer.

Fuse panel in end of dash

Aspecialtoolforremovingfusesisprovided

on the hatch on the left-hand end of the

dash. Simply push the tool onto the fuse,

squeeze and remove the fuse.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 249

Interior lighting incl. glove box

Accessories

Radio, sound system I 3 ; control panel,

Infotainment System 3

Control module in driver’s door

Passenger Sensing System

7.5 Manual climate control 3

7.5 Headlight levelling switch 3

7.5 Hands-free 3 ; brake light switch; manual climate

control 3 ; clutch pedal switch

Fuse panel in end of fascia

Cigarette lighter 3

No. Amp. Function

Cabin fan

Steering wheel lock

7.5 Airbag control module

Steering column unit; ignition switch

Hands-free 3 ;CD-player 3 /CD-changerincabin 3 ;

Yaw sensor (cars with ESP)

SID

Main instrument unit; manual climate control;

automatic climate control (ACC) 3

7.5 Control module in front doors; Park Brake Shift Lock

(automatic transmission)

7.5 Brake light switch

Dash fuse panel; fuel filler door

Control module in passenger front door

Dash fuse panel

Trailer socket 3 ; electrical socket in storage com-

partment between seats 3

Data link connection (diagnostics)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

250

Car care

Trunk fuse panel, left-hand side

No. Amp. Function

1–5 MAXI -

30 Control module in left rear door

30 Control module in right rear door

20 Trailer 3

30 Left-hand brake light; rear right turn signal; right tail-

light; right reversing light; high-mounted brake light;

trailer lights

15 15 Seat heating, left seat 3

Trunk fuse panel, Sport Sedan

16 15 Seat heating, right seat 3

7.5 Autodimming rearview mirror 3 ; rain sensor 3

18 15 Sunroof 3

7.5 Telematics (OnStar) 3

7.5 DVD player (navigation system) 3

7.5 Saab Parking Assistance (SPA) 3 ; control module in

rear doors

22 30 Amplifier, sound system III 3

24 10 Movement sensor 3 ; CD changer in trunk 3

25 30 Electrically adjustable driver’s seat with memory 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 251

30 Right-handstoplight;rearleftturnsignal;lefttaillight;

rear fog light; left reversing light; license plate light-

ing; trunk lighting; trailer lights

10 Convertible:Lumbarsupport,electricallyadjustable

front seat 3

28 15 Telematics

Trunk fuse panel, Convertible

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

252

Car care

15 30 Washer fluid pump, headlights 3

30 Front right parking light; front right turn signal; left and

right side turn signal; right high beam; left low beam;

front left fog light 3

17 30 Windshield wiper motor, low speed

18 30 Windshield wiper motor, high speed

19 20 Parking heater; auxiliary heater 3

20 10 Headlight levelling 3

22 30 Washer fluid pump, windshield

Fuse panel in engine bay

No. Amp. Function

24 20 Flash-to-pass

25 20 Amplifier, sound system II 3

30 Front left turn signal; front left parking light; front right

10 Engine control module; automatic transmission con-

trol module 3

fog light 3 ; right low beam; left high beam

20 Horn

27 MAXI

–37

10 Engine control module; battery disconnect switch 3

10 Selector lever, automatic transmission 3 ; clutch pedal

switch

Relay for vacuumpump (brake system) 3

12 10 Washer fluid pump, rear window 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 253

Relays

R 1 Washer fluid pump, windshield

R 2 -

R 3 -

R 4 -

R 5 Flash-to-pass

R 6 Horn

R 7 -

R 8 Starter motor

R 9 Windshield wipers ON/OFF

R10 Washer fluid pump, rear window 3

R11 Ignition +15

Fuse panel in front of battery 3

R12 Windshield wipers, high/low speed

R13 -

No. Amp. Function

Air pump, secondary air 3

R14 Washer fluid pump, headlights 3

R15 -

Fuel pump; preheated oxygen sensors (lambda

probe)

A/C compressor

Main relay

R16 -

Relays

1 -

2 A/C-compressor

3 Preheated oxygen sensors (lambda probe)

4 Main relay, engine (ECM/EVAP/injectors)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

254

Car care

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should consult the appropriate section of

thisowner’smanualtodeterminetheproper

tireinflationpressure, seepage 306.)When

the low tire pressure telltale is illuminated,

one or more of your tires is significantly

underinflated.

Automatic tire pressure

monitoring 3

NOTICE

Great care must be taken when changing

tires so as notto damagethesensors that

are integrated in the valves.

WARNING

The system is intended to aid the driver.

The driver is always ultimately responsi-

ble for ensuring that the tire pressure is

correct.

• Remove the rear side first.

• Start removing the tire at a point oppo-

site the valve.

For optimum safety, economy and

comfort, check the tires regularly, even if

the automatic tire pressure monitoring

system has not issued an alarm

• Do not allow the tire removal equip-

ment to come closer than approx.

10 cm to the valve.

You should stop and check your tires as

soon as possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure. Driving on a significantly

under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-

heat and can lead to tire failure.

• Start and finish fitting approx. 4 in.

(10 cm) from the valve.

The pressuremonitoring system consists of

a sensor in each wheel, a detector in three

wheelhousingsandareceiver.Thesensors

are located inside the wheels directly adja-

cent to the air valves.

• Do not inflate the tire to above

700 kPa/100 psi.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 255

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency

and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-

cle’s handling and stopping ability.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction telltale to indicate when

the system is not operating properly. When

the malfunction telltale is illuminated, the

system may not be able to detect or signal

low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-

functionsmayoccurforavarietyofreasons,

including the installation of incompatible

replacement tires on the vehicle. Always

check the TPMS malfunction telltale after

replacing one or more tires on your vehicle

to ensure that the replacement tires are

compatible with the TPMS.

Valve with sensor

Valve without sensor

Tire pressure information is sent wirelessly

to the receiver.

The system checks the tire pressure when

the car is travelling over 18 mph (30 km/h).

The system is “self-learning”, which means

that the position of the wheels can be

changed without requiring adjustments to

the monitoring system. The spare wheel

does not have a sensor.

If the tire pressure drops

If the vehicle is equipped with a different

wheelsizethan those fitted as standard and

therefore should use a different recom-

mended highest tire pressure the owner

shallcontactaworkshoptohavethesystem

recalibrated. We recommend that you

contact a Saab dealer.

Ifthetirepressuredrops25%ormorebelow

highest recommended pressure (see tire

pressure label on page 267), the SID will

issue a warning as to which tire is affected.

Low tire pressure,

front left.

Make a safe stop.

The sensorbatterieshaveanaverage lifeof

10 years. The batteries cannot be changed

but require the sensor units to be replaced.

Adjust the tire pressure as soon as possible.

The system does not warn if a tire is overin-

flated.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

256

Car care

If the tire pressure continues to drop, the

SID will issue a warning alarm when the

pressure is an additional 0.2 bar below the

first warning level.

Malfunction

Tires

Tire pressure

system failure.

Contact Saab dealer.

Your new vehicle comes with high-quality

tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If

you ever have questions about your tire

warranty and where to obtain service, see

your Saab Warranty and Service Record

Booklet for details.

Low tire pressure.

front left.

Check tires.

The message shown above will be dis-

played on the SID if:

• a wheel without pressure sensor is fitted

(e.g. spare wheel)

• one, two or three pressure sensors are

broken or missing

• two or more detectors are missing or

broken

Reduce speed (avoid heavy braking and

violent steering wheel movements) and

stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.

Change the wheel.

WARNING

Poor maintained and improperly used

tires are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can cause

overheating as a result of too much

friction. You could have an blow-out

and a serious accident. See “Loading

Your Vehicle” on page 267.

• the receiver malfunctions

• a fault arises in the system.

Themessageshownaboveis not displayed

if none of the wheels have sensors, such as

if winter wheels without sensors are fitted.

• Underinflated tires pose the same

danger as overloaded tires. The

resultingaccidentcouldcauseserious

injury. Check all tires frequently to

maintain the recommended pressure.

Tire pressure should be checked

when your tires are cold.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to be

cut, punctured or broken by a sudden

impact – such as when you hit a

pothole. Keep tires at the recom-

mended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If

yourtreadisbadlyworn, or if yourtires

have been damaged, replace them.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 257

Adjust the tire pressure to match the current

load and speed of the car (see page 306).

The stated tire pressures apply to cold tires,

i.e. tires that are the same temperature as

the outside air temperature. Tire pressure

increases as the tires become warm (e.g.

during highway driving) by approximately

4 psi(28 kPa).Whenthetemperatureofthe

tires changes by 50°F (10°C), the tire pres-

sure will change 2 psi (14 kPa).

Inflation - Tire Pressure

High speed operation

The Tire-Loading Information label shows

the correct inflation pressures for your tires

when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehi-

cle has been sitting for at least three hours

or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that

underinflation or overinflation is all

right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have

enough air (underinflation), you can get

the following:

WARNING

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph

(160 km/h) or higher, puts an additional

strain on tires.

Sustained high-speed driving causes

excessive heat build up and can cause

sudden tire failure. You could have a

crash and you or others could be killed.

Some high-speed rated tires require infla-

tion pressure adjustment for high speed

operation. When speed limits and road

conditions are such that a vehicle can be

drivenathighspeeds, makesurethetires

are rated for high speed operation, in

excellent condition, and set to the correct

cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle

load.

Neverreducethepressureofahottire.Ifthe

tires are hot when you check them, only

increase the pressure, if necessary.

• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Bad wear

• Bad handling

• Bad fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (overinfla-

tion), you can get the following:

• Unusual wear

• Bad handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

258

Car care

If you’ll be driving at high speeds, speeds of

100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is

legal, set the cold inflation pressure to the

maximum inflation pressure shown on the

tire sidewall, or to 35 psi (244 kPa), which-

ever is lower. See the example below.

When you end this high-speed driving,

return to the cold inflation pressure shown

on the Tire and Loading Information label.

See Loading Your Vehicle on page 267.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the

front and rear inflation pressures as shown

ontheTire-LoadingInformationlabel. Make

certain that all wheel nuts are properly tight-

ened. See page 274.

When to check

Check your tires once a month or more.

Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It

should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).

How to Check

WARNING

Use a good quality pocket-type gage to

check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your

tires are properly inflated simply by looking

at them. Radial tires may look properly

inflated even when they’re underinflated.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the

valve stems. They help prevent leaks by

keeping out dirt and moisture.

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to

which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts

become loose after a time. The wheel

could come off and cause an accident.

When you change a wheel, remove any

rust or dirt from places where the wheel

attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,

you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do

this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire

brush later, if you need to, to get all the

rust or dirt off. See “Changing a tire” on

page 273.

Example:

You’ll find maximum load and inflation pres-

sure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small

letters near the rim flange. It will read some-

thing like this: Maximum load 690 kg

Tire Inspection and Rotation

Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles

(12 500 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate

your tires as soon as possible and check

wheel alignment. Also check for damaged

tires or wheels. See “When It Is Time for

New Tires” on page 259 and “Wheel

Replacement” on page 262 for more infor-

mation.

(1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press

For this example, you wouldset the inflation

pressure for high-speed driving at 35 psi

(244 kPa).

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve

more uniform wear for all tires on the vehi-

cle. The first rotation is the most important.

When rotating your tires, always use the

correct rotation pattern. Left front tire to left

rear. Left rear tire to right front. Right front to

right rear. Right rear to left front.

Don’t include the compact spare tire in your

tire rotation.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 259

Flat spotting

When It Is Time for New Tires

All tires get hot, especially on long journeys

or when the car is driven hard. After the car

has been parked with hot tires and the tires

havecooleddown,aflatspotcanforminthe

tire, where it is in contact with the ground.

The same can occur if the car has not been

moved for a long time.

Flat spots can cause vibration that can be

felt through the steering wheel, similar to

that experiencedwhenthewheels need bal-

ancing.

One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is

tocheckthetreadwear indicators, whichwill

appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch

(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following

statements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or

more places around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing

through the tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or

snagged deep enough to show cord or

fabric.

Flat spots of this type disappear once the

tiresgethotagain,usuallyafter10–15 miles

(20–25 km) of driving at cruising speed. If

the outdoor temperature is low it takes a

longer distance.

Treadwear indicator

• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut or other

damage that can’t be repaired well

because of the size or location of the

damage.

Treadwear indicators

The tires incorporate wear indicators in the

form of smooth, treadless strips across the

width, which become visible when only

2/32"(1.6 mm)oftreadremains.Assoonas

the indicators become visible, new tires

should be fitted without delay.

Make sure you are familiar with the legal

limit for minimum tread depth in your

country and also any regulations gov-

erning the use of winter (snow) tires.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

260

Car care

The wheels and tires have been carefully

matchedtothecharacteristicsofthecarand

play a key role in its outstanding roadhold-

ing and handling.

Do not take it for granted that a wheel/tire

combination will work in the best possible

way, just because it can be fitted to the car.

To ensure that the speedometer is as accu-

rate as possible it should be reprogrammed

if wheels of a different dimension are fitted.

Contact a Saab dealer.

Because of front wheel drive, the front tires

tend to wear faster than the rear ones. New

tires should always be fitted in pairs, so that

tires on the same axle have the same

amount of tread.

Buying New Tires

To find out what kind and size of tires you

need, look at the Tire-Loading Information

label.

If you wish to fit other tires or wheels than

those supplied with the car, consult your

Saab dealer first as to the possibilities

available.

Wheels/tires combinations that are not

approved by Saab can negatively affect the

car’s directional stability, steering and brak-

ing in both wet and dry conditions.

NOTICE

Always consult your Saab dealer before

changingthecar’swheels or tiresonyour

Saab.

Wide wheels andtires with sidewalls that

are too low can:

• be damaged in potholes, etc.

• cause springs, shock absorbers and

wheel bearings and body mountings

to be overloaded.

• affect the function of the Electronic

Stability Program (ESP).

Store wheels lying flat or hanging – never

standing upright.

The speed and load limits of the tires

must not be exceeded; see page 266.

Wheels larger than 17" must not be fitted

on the Saab 9-3 for reasons above. The

permissible offset is 1.61 inch (41 mm).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 261

Treadwear

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

The treadwear grade is a comparative

rating based on the wear rate of the tire

when tested under controlled conditions on

a specified government test course. For

example, a tire graded 150 would wear one

and a half (1.5) times as well on the govern-

ment course as a tire graded 100. The rela-

tive performance of tires depends upon the

actual conditions of their use, however, and

may depart significantly from the norm due

to variations in driving habits, service prac-

tices and differences in road characteristics

and climate.

Quality grades can be found where applica-

ble on the tire sidewall between tread shoul-

der and maximum section width. For exam-

ple:

WARNING

Mixing tires could cause you to lose

control while driving. If you mix tires of

different sizes or types (radial and bias-

belted tires), the vehicle may not handle

properly, and you could have a crash.

Using tires of different sizes may also

cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to

use the same size and type tires on all

wheels. It’s all right to drive with your

compact spare temporarily, it was devel-

oped for use on your vehicle. See

Treadwear200TractionAATemperature

The following information relates to the

system developed by the United States

National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-

tion, which grades tires by treadwear, trac-

tion and temperature performance. (This

applies only to vehicles sold in the United

States.) The grades are molded on the side-

walls of most passenger car tires. The Uni-

form Tire Quality Grading system does not

apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,

space-saver or temporary use spare tires,

tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12

inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-pro-

duction tires.

While the tires available on General Motors

passenger cars and light trucks may vary

withrespect tothese grades, theymust also

conform to federal safety requirements and

additional General Motors Tire Perfor-

mance Criteria (TPC) standards.

“Compact spare” on page 270.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,

are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-

sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlled condi-

tions on specified government test surfaces

of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C

may have poor traction performance. Warn-

ing: The traction grade assigned to this tire

is based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

WARNING

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,

the wheel rim flanges could develop

cracks after many miles of driving. A tire

and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing

a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the

wheels on your vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

262

Car care

Temperature – A, B, C

Wheel Alignment and Tire

Balance

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned

and balanced carefully at the factory to give

you the longest tire life and best overall per-

formance.

Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel bal-

ancing are not needed. However, if you

notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pull-

ing one way or the other, the alignment may

need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle

vibrating when driving on a smooth road,

your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

Wheel Replacement

The temperaturegrades areA (the highest),

B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance

tothegeneration of heatand itsability to dis-

sipate heat when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to degenerate

and reduce tire life, and excessive temper-

ature can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-

mance which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on

the laboratory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or

badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep

coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and

wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel

leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum

wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).

See your dealer if any of these conditions

exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you

need.

Each new wheel should have the same

load-carrying capacity, diameter, width,

offset and be mounted the same way as the

one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels,

wheelboltsorwheelnuts, replacethemonly

with new Saab original equipment parts.

This way, you will be sure to have the right

wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your

vehicle.

Warning:Thetemperaturegradeforthistire

is established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, underinflation, orexcessiveloading,

either separately or in combination, can

cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

WARNING

Using the wrong replacement wheels,

wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle

can be dangerous. It could affect the

braking and handling of your vehicle,

make your tires lose air and make you

lose control. You could have a collision in

which you or others could be injured.

Alwaysusethecorrect wheel, wheel bolts

and wheel nuts for replacement.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 263

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause

problems with bearing life, brake cool-

ing, speedometer or odometer calibra-

tion, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehi-

cle ground clearance and tire or tire

chain clearance to the body and chassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

WARNING

Tire Chains

WARNING

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is

dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been

used or how far it’s been driven. It could

fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you

have to replace a wheel, use a new GM

original equipment wheel.

If your vehicle has 235/45 R17 size tires,

don’t use tire chains, there’s not enough

clearance.

See “Changing a tire” on page 273.

Tire chains used on a vehicle without the

proper amount of clearance can cause

damage to the brakes, suspension or

othervehicleparts.Theareadamagedby

the tire chains could cause you to lose

control of your vehicle and you or others

may be injured in a crash.

WARNING

When fitting just one new pair of tires,

these should be fitted to the rear wheels,

as these are more critical to the direc-

tional stability of the car (e.g. on braking

or in a skid). The existing rear wheels

should therefore be moved to the front.

Use another type of traction device only if

its manufacturer recommends it for use

on your vehicle and tire size combination

and road conditions. Follow that manu-

facturer’s instructions. To help avoid

damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,

readjust or remove the device if it’s

contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin

your wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit,

install them on the front tires.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

264

Car care

Notice: If your vehicle does not have

235/45R17 size tires, use tire chains only

where legal and only when you must.

Contact your Saab dealer regarding suit-

able snow chains. Install them on the

front tires and tighten them as tightly as

possible with the ends securely

fastened. Drive slowly and follow the

chainmanufacturer’sinstructions.Ifyou

can hear the chains contacting your

vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the

contact continues, slow down until it

stops. Driving too fast or spinning the

wheels with chains on will damage your

vehicle.

If a Tire Goes Flat

Tire Sidewall Labeling

Useful information about a tire is molded

into it´s sidewall.

It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while

you’re driving, especially if you maintain

your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire,

it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But

ifyoushouldeverhavea“blowout”,hereare

a few tips about what to expect and what to

do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a

drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side.

Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and

grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to main-

tain lane position, and then gently brake to

a stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts

much like a skid and may require the same

correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear

blowout, remove your foot from the acceler-

ator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by

steering the way you want the vehicle to go.

Itmaybeverybumpyandnoisy, butyoucan

still steer. Gently brake to a stop – well off

the road if possible.

Tire size: The tire size ia a combination of

letters and numbers used to define a partic-

ular tire´s width, height, aspect ratio, con-

struction type and service description.

Department of Transportation (DOT):

The Department of Transportation (DOT)

code indicates that the tire is in compliance

with the U.S. Department of Transportation

Motor Vehicle Safety standards.

Tire Identification Number (TIN): The let-

ters and numbers following DOT code are

the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The

TIN shows the manufacturer and plant

code, tire size, and date the tire was manu-

factured. The TIN is molded onto both sides

of the tire.

Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and

number of plies in the sidewall and under

the tread.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to

use your jacking equipment to change a flat

tire safely.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 265

Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):

Tire manufacturers are required to grade

tires based on the performance factors:

treadwear, traction and temperature resis-

tance. For more information see “Uniform

Tire Quality Grading” on page 261.

Aspect ratio: A two-digit number that indi-

cates the tire height-to-width measure-

ments. For example, if the tire size aspect

ratio is “55”, as shown in item “C” of the illus-

tration, it would meanthat the tire´s sidewall

is 55% as high as it is wide.

Tire Size

The following illustration shows an example

of a typical passenger car tire size.

215 / 55

16 93

MaximumCold Inflation Load Limit: Max-

imum load that can be carried and the max-

imum pressure needed to support that load.

For information on recommended tire pres-

sure see “Recommended lowest tire pres-

sure, cold tires” on page 306 and “Loading

Your Vehicle” on page 267.

Belt Rating: A letter code is used to indicate

the type of ply construction in the tire. The

letter “R” means radial ply construction; the

letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply con-

struction; and the letter “B” means belted-

bias ply construction.

Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in

inches.

Load range:Theload range representsthe

load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry.

a Tire Width

b Aspect Ratio

c Belt Rating

d Rim diameter

e Load range

f Speed rating

Speed Rating: The maximum speed that a

tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings

range from “A” to “Z”.

Tire Width: The three-digit number indi-

cates the tire section width in millimeters

from sidewall to sidewall.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

266

Car care

Tire markings

Speed ratings

An example of the meaning of the different

markings in a tire size is given below for a

tire size of 225/45 R17 94H:

Tire approved for speeds up to

Q 100 mph (160 km/h)

S Max. 112 mph (180 km/h)

T Max. 118 mph (190 km/h)

H Max. 130 mph (210 km/h)

V Max. 149 mph (240 km/h)

W Max. 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y Max. 186 mph (300 km/h)

225 Tire section width, mm

Aspect ratio, i.e. the section height

as a percentage of the section

45 width

TIN-code

a Manufacturer´s Identification Mark

b Tire Size

R Radial ply

Wheel rim diameter 17 in at bead

17 seats

c Tire Type Code

d Date of Manufacture

94 Tire load index

H Speed rating

Tire load indices

Tire approved for max. 1355 lbs.

91 (615 kg)

93 Max. 1433 lbs. (650 kg)

94 Max. 1477 lbs. (670 kg)

95 Max. 1521 lbs. (690 kg)

97 Max. 1609 lbs. (730 kg)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 267

DOT Markings: A code molded into the

sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in

compliance with the U.S. Department of

Transportation motor vehicle safety stan-

dards. The DOT code includes the Tire

Identification Number (TIN), an alphanu-

meric designator which can also identify the

tire manufacturer, production plant, brand

and date of production.

Loading Your Vehicle

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the

tirepressingoutwardoneachsquareinchof

thetire. Airpressureis expressedinpounds

per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the com-

bined weight of optional accessories, for

example, automatic transmission, power

steering, power brakes, power windows,

power seats, radio and air conditioning.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see

“Loading Your Vehicle” on page 267.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire´s

height to its width.

This label can only be found on vehicles

sold in the U.S.

Vehicles sold in Canada have the tire

information label in the glove box, see

page 307.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for

the front axle, see “Loading Your Vehicle”

on page 295.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for

therearaxle, see“LoadingYourVehicle”on

page 267.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of

an asymmetrical tire that must always face

outward when mounted on a vehicle.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is

located between the plies and the tread.

Cords may be made from steel or other rein-

forcing materials.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the

ply cords that extendto the beads are laidat

alternate angles substantially less than 90

degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Cold Inflation Pressure: Theamount of air

pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per

square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa), before

a tire has built up heat from driving. See

“Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 257.

Curb weight: This means the weight of a

motor vehicle with standard and optional

equipment including the maximum capacity

of fuel, oil and coolant, without passengers

and cargo.

This is an example of what your vehicle´s

Tire-Loading Information/Certification label

might look like. It is located on the B-pillar

and shows how much weight your vehicle

may properly carry. The label tells you the

proper size, and recommended inflation

pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It

also gives you important information about

the number of people that can be in your

vehicle and the total weight that you can

carry. This weight is called the Vehicle

CapacityWeight, andincludesthe weightof

all occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-

installed options.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air

pressure. There are 6.9 kPa to one psi.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used

on light duty trucks and some multipurpose

passenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging

from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load

carrying capacity of a tire.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

268

Car care

Maximum Load rating: The load rating for

a tire at the maximum permissible inflation

pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The

sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehi-

cle capacity weight; and production options

weight.

Maximum Permissible Inflation Pres-

sure: The maximum cold inflation pressure

to which a tire may be inflated.

Normal occupant weight: The number of

occupants a vehicle is designed to seat mul-

tipled by 150 pounds (68 kg). See “Loading

Your Vehicle” on page 267.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehi-

cle manufacturer´s recommended tire infla-

tion pressure shown on the tire placard, see

“Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 257 and

“Loading Your Vehicle” on page 267.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which

the ply cords that extend to the beads are

laid at substantially 90 degrees to the cen-

terline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire or a tire and

tube assembly upon which the tire beads

are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the

tread and the bead.

Speed rating: An alphanumeric code

assigned to a tire indicating the maximum

speed at which a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and

the road surface. The amount of grip pro-

vided.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,

sometimes called “wear bars”, that show

across the tread of a tire when only

2/32 inch of tread remains. See “When It Is

Time for New Tires” on page 259.

Tread Width: The width of the tire´s tread.

UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grade Stan-

dards, a tire information system that pro-

vides consumers with ratings for a tire´s

traction, temperature and treadwear. Rat-

ings are determined by tire manufacturers

using government testing procedures. The

rating are molded into the sidewall of the

tire. See “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” on

page 261.

VehicleCapacityWeight:Isthenumber of

designated seating positions multipled by

150 pounds (68 kg) plus the rated cargo

load. See “Loading Your Vehicle” on

page 267.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load

on an individual tire due to curb weight,

accessory weight, occupant weight and

cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently

attached to a vehicle showing original

equipment tire size and the recommended

cold inflation pressure. See “Loading Your

Vehicle” on page 267.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seat-

ing positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a

asymmetrical tire that has a particular side

that facesoutward whenmounted on avehi-

cle. The sideof thetire that contains a white-

wall bears white lettering or bears manufac-

turer, brand and or model name molding on

the other sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on

passenger cars and some light duty trucks

and multipurpose vehicles.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 269

5 Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be trans-

ferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your vehi-

cle.

Steps for Determining Correct

Load Limit

1 Locate the statement “The

combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed

XXX pounds” on your vehicle´s

placard.

2 Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will

be riding in your vehicle.

3 Substract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

Winter tires

Winter (snow) tires are recommended for

winter climates where the majority of your

driving will be done on snow and ice. Winter

tires should be fitted to all four wheels to

maintain a proper balance. Your Saab

dealer can advise you of to the correct size

tire for your car (if different from the original

size) and also supply Saab approved winter

tires pre-mounted on steel or alloy rims.

Winter tires normally use a different speed

ratingcomparedtosummer/allseasontires.

Make sure not to exceed the stated speed

rating on the tires you use.

4 The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if the

“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and

there will be five 150 lb. passengers

in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capac-

ity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5x150) =

650 lbs.).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

270

Car care

The spare tire, the tools and the jack with its

crank are carried under a panel in the trunk.

Compact spare

Foldthecarpetingforwardtoeaseaccessto

the tools and spare tire.

WARNING

The screwdriver handle has a “button” for

removing plastic rivets. This type of rivet

must be removed when changing the light

bulb in the trunk lid (see page 241).

The spare tire or punctured tire must be

stowedunder thetrunkfloor, andsecured

in place with the retaining nut.

Your Saab is equipped with a trip computer

and you can use its “Speed warning” func-

tion, to monitor driving speed since you

must not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h), see

page 94.

The compact spare is light and easy to

handle when changing the tire. Its use is

only permitted whena standardtire hassus-

tained a puncture. The maximum life of the

tire is only just over 2,000 miles (3,500 km).

Date code

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with the

compact spare fitted.

The tire pressure should be 60 psi

(420 kPa). Put the punctured tire in the

spare wheel well under the trunk floor.

“Driving with the compact spare tire”, see

page 208.

Tire date code

Tires should be regarded as perishable

goods.Asthetiresage,therubberbecomes

progressively harder, and the roadholding

ability of the tires diminishes. This is partic-

ularly true on winter tires.

Tires havea code thatspecifiestheir dateof

manufacture. The first two digits denote the

week number and the last two digits the

year.

Have the standard tire repaired and refitted

as soon as possible.

Accordingly, a date code of 3701 signifies

that the tire was manufactured in week 37,

2001.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 271

life of the tire is only just over 2,000 miles

(approx. 3,500 km).

• Refit the standard tire as soon as possi-

ble.

Tools under a panel in the trunk

Driving with a compact wheel

fitted

Important considerations when driving with

a compact spare tire:

WARNING

NOTICE

To avoid damaging a alloy wheel of a

punctured tire, this can be temporarily

placed outside up in the spare wheel well

but only while driving to the closest work-

shop.

• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). The

tire can overheat affecting the car’s

roadholding.

• The car’s ground clearance is reduced.

• Thecarmustnotbedrivenwithmorethan

one compact spare tire at a time.

• Avoid driving against the curb.

• Do not use snow chains.

• Do not fit the wheel cover - this would

conceal the warning text.

• Tire pressure: refer to page 304.

• The spare tire or punctured tire must

be stowed under the trunk floor, and

secured in place with the retaining nut.

As ageneral rule, all heavy loads must be

well secured in the trunk (see page 149).

Observe the following when the compact

spare tire is fitted:

• The compact spare is light and easy to

handle when changing a tire.

• Do not drive further than necessary with

the compact spare fitted - the maximum

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

272

Car care

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 273

Changing a tire

To beeven more certain the vehiclewon't

move, you should put blocks at the front

and rear of the tire farthest away from the

one being changed. That would be the

tire, on the other side, at the opposite end

of the vehicle.

• The jack should be stored correctly

under the carpeting in the trunk. If it

lies loose in the car, it could thrown

forward and cause personal injury in

the event of a crash or if the car rolls

over.

WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do

maintenance or repairs is dangerous

without the appropriate safety equipment

and training. The jack provided with your

vehicle is designed only for changing a

flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you

or others could be badly injured or killed if

the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the jack

provided with your vehicle only for chang-

ing a flat tire.

• The car jack is designed solely for use

in changing a tire or fitting snow

chains. It must not be used to

support the car during repair work

or servicing.

• Grit, salt and rust can clog the inner

threadsofthewheelboltsifthecarhas

been driven for several years exclu-

sively with alloy wheels.

If steel wheels are being installed, the

bolt hole threads in the brake hubs

should be cleaned before the thinner

steel wheels are fitted. It may other-

wise not be possible to achieve the

correct clamping force, despite tight-

ening the wheel bolts to the correct

torque.

• Never crawl under a car that is

supported only by a jack. Always use

axle stands.

Changing a tire can be dangerous. The

vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over

or fall on you or other people. You and

they couldbebadly injured or evenkilled.

Find a level place to change your tire. To

help prevent the vehicle from moving:

• Raising your vehicle too high or with

the jack improperly positioned can

damage the vehicle and even make

thevehiclefall. Tohelpavoidpersonal

injury and vehicle damage, be sure to

fit the jack lift head into the proper

locationbeforeraisingthevehicle,and

raise the vehicle only far enough off

thegroundsothereisenoughroomfor

the spare tire to fit (no more than

1 Set the parking brake firmly.

2 If you have an automatic transmis-

sion, put the shift lever in PARK (P).

For a manual transmission, leave the

car in gear (1st or REVERSE (R)).

3 Turn off the engine and do not restart

while the vehicle is raised.

25 mm or 1 inch clearance between

the ground and the bottom of the tire).

• Switch on the hazard warning lights if

the car is on a road.

4 Do not allow passengers to remain in

the vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

274

Car care

When the car has to be lifted, the jack must

be positioned at one of the four jacking

points (front or rear) under the sill members.

If a floor jack is used, the lifting plate must

be positioned under the normal jacking

points, see illustration. If the car is equipped

with a towbar, the jack can also be placed

under this.

NOTICE

Apply the jack only to the jacking points

indicated on the body.

Marking of jacking points

Jacking points

1 Wind the jack up to a suitable height

before placing it under the jacking point.

Each jacking point is indicated by an

arrow on the sill (see illustration).

Make sure that the jack fully engages

the jacking point in the underside of the

sillmemberandthattheentirefootofthe

jack is steady and flat on the ground.

The jack must not stand on snow, ice or

similar.

2 It is not necessary to remove the wheel

cover.

4 Clean any rust or dirt from the contact

surfaces between the wheel and brake

disc. Do not wipe away the grease in the

wheel hub.

5 Add a thin layer of grease on the bolts

before fitting, see page 276. Fit the

wheel and screw in the bolts in the

sequenceshownonpage 276(opposite

pairs).

If, none the less, you wish to remove the

wheel cover, take hold of the outer edge

and pull it straight out.

Loosen the wheel bolts half a turn.

3 Wind the jack to raise the wheel clear of

theground. Removethewheelboltsand

lift off the wheel.

Wind up the jack until it just begins to lift

the car.

Tighten the bolts enough for the bolts

and wheel to be seated correctly.

6 Lower the car and tighten the wheel

bolts to torque in sequence as shown on

page 276.

Tightening torque:

Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).

Steel wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 275

Jacking points for floor jack

Clean any rust or dirt from the contact sur-

faces between the wheel and brake disc.

Do not wipe away the grease in the wheel

hub.

NOTICE

7 Retouching the wheel bolts after twenty

or so miles.

• Do not overtighten the bolts using a

impact wrench: not only can this

damage the wheels but it can also

make it impossible to undo the bolts

using the wheel wrench in the car’s

toolkit.

Tightening torque:

Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).

Steel wheels: 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).

We advise against using wheels with large

ventilation slots in winter, as the brake com-

ponents are then more exposed to slush,

road salt and grit.

If you fit wheels of a different dimension, the

speedometer can be reprogrammed to

ensure it is as accurate as possible. We rec-

ommend that you contact a Saab dealer.

• When refitting a wheel cover, make

sure that the valve protrudes through

the marked recess in the wheel cover.

Driving with tire chains 3, see page 196

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

276

Car care

Safety belts

Upholstery and trim

To remove fluff and hairs from the seats,

door armrests and headlining, use a

vacuum cleaner, a moist lint-free cloth, or a

clothes brush. Remove spots and dirt using

a cloth moistened with lukewarm soapy

water.

WARNING

If the car is involved in a crash, the safety

belts, belt pretensioners and other asso-

ciated components must be inspected.

We recommend that you contact a Saab

dealer.

When using a stain remover, always work

from the outside towards the centre to avoid

leaving a ring. If a soiled ring or spot should

remain, it can usually be removed using

lukewarm soapy water or water alone.

Spots left by liquids, such as soft drinks or

thin oil, must be removed at once with an

absorbent material, such as kitchen towel-

ling. Then clean with a stain remover.

Never make any alterations or repairs to

the safety belts yourself. We recommend

that you contact a Saab dealer dealer.

Grease the surfaces indicated with a thin

layer of grease

Check the function of the safety belts regu-

larly as follows:

White spirit is recommended for removing

grease and oil stains. A medium stiff brush

may also be used.

• Holdthediagonalstrapand pull it sharply.

The safety belt should lock and it should

not be possible to withdraw it further.

Tightening sequence, wheel bolts

Check the anchorage points in the floor.

They must not have suffered rust damage.

If a belt is worn or has any fraying edges, it

should be replaced.

Safety belts must not come into contact with

substances such as polishes, oil or chemi-

cals. If the belts get dirty, wash them with

warm water and a detergent or have them

replaced.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 277

Cleaning and caring for leather

upholstery

Textile carpeting

Washing

Textile carpeting should be vacuum

cleaned regularly. Carpeting can also be

cleanedusinga brush or spongeandcarpet

shampoo.

The bodywork must be washed frequently.

When the car is new, the body should be

washed by hand using plain cold water and

a clean, soft brush through which the water

flows. Automatic caresses should be

avoided when the car is new.

The principal reason for treating leather

upholstery is to maintain its elegant appear-

ance and to provide it with a protective film.

Disco lour at ion caused by dust and wear

mainly affects the lighter shades, although

this is not detrimental to the leather, indeed,

the patina resulting from use is often consid-

ered desirable in leather. But if the leather is

allowed to becometoo grubby, itcan startto

look shabby.

The leather upholstery should be cleaned

and reconditioned twice a year in conjunc-

tion with spring and autumn inspections. In

very warm, dry climates the leather may

need more regular reconditioning. Use con-

ventional leather care products. Follow the

instructions on the packaging.

For safety reasons, vacuum cleaners that

are not earthed (grounded) must not be

used out of doors.

After 5–6 months the paintwork will have

hardened. To facilitate cleaning, a suitable

detergent can be added to the water, which

should be lukewarm.

Remove any bird droppings without delay,

as these can discolor the paintwork and

prove difficult to polish out. Lay a wad of wet

paper on the patch of dirt and leave it for a

minute or so. It will then be easy to wash off

the dirt.

Engine bay

The engine bay should be cleaned with an

engine decreasing and rinsed with hot

water. The headlights must be covered

over. Do not use a pressure washer. Avoid

spraying electrical components and con-

nectors.

Use a soft cloth moistened with white spirit

to remove splashes of tar or asphalt. Do not

use strong cleaners, as these can dry out

the paintwork.

Do not use petrol as a cleaning agent or sol-

vent when carrying out repairs or mainte-

nance. Saab recommends the use of envi-

ronmentally-friendly decrescendos.

Do not use unknown harsh polishing

agents, cleaning agents, sprays, coarse

soap or hot water.

NOTICE

Donotusealcohol-basedcleanersonthe

plastic lenses of the front or rear lights, as

these can cause a crackling effect on the

lenses.

The door mirrors should be folded in

before the car enters an automatic car

wash.

The underside of the car also needs wash-

ing regularly, and this should be done extra

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

278

Car care

thoroughly at the end of winter. Clean the

underside of thecarby handifthecar is usu-

ally washed in an automatic car wash with-

out special facilities for underbody cleaning.

Never wash or leave the car to dry in the

sun, but wipe it dry with a chamois leather

immediately after washing to avoid smears

and streaks.

Clean the inside of window glass using a

proprietary window cleaner. This is particu-

larly important when the car is new, as

upholstery and trim have a tendency to

sweat a little at first.

Keep the glass well polished, as this helps

to prevent misting.

Convertible:

NOTICE

• Wash the soft top with a mild soap solu-

tion and lukewarm water. For spot clean-

ing the top, a finger nail brush can also be

used. Stroke the brush in the direction of

the fabric, not across the threads.

• If a pressure washer is used be heedful of

the following recommendations:

• on the lower part of the car (not higher

than the door handles): max pressure

of 100 bar and not closer than 8 in.

(20 cm).

• on the upper part of the car: tax pres-

sure of 100 bar and not closer than

32 in. (80 cm).

• Tryyourbrakesonleavingacar wash.

Wet brake discs reduce the perfor-

mance of the brakes.

• Fixed antennae, such as for a mobile

phone, must be removed if the car

goes through an automatic car wash.

• Cars with Saab Parking Assistance:

Do not spray the sensors or closer

than 8 in. (20 cm) to the sensors with

a pressure washer, as this can

damage them.

Clean the outside of the windows with Saab

washer fluid. This is especially important if

the car has been washed in an automatic

car wash, as sometimes a wax treatment is

used that can contaminate the windshield

and impair the performance of the wipers.

• Do not use any drying chemicals or water-

proofing agents.

• Avoid automatic car washes.

IntheU.S., Saab offers afull complementof

car care products. See your dealer or visit

us at www.saabcatalog.com.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 279

ble, the damaged area should be taken

back to the bare metal. The metal should

then be primed with two thin coats of primer

applied by brush.

Aftertheprimerhasdried, applyseveralthin

layers of topcoat until the surface of the

repaired area is flush with the surrounding

paintwork.

Waxing and polishing

Do not wax a new car during the first three

or four months. In fact, there is no need to

polish the car before the paintwork has

started to dull through oxidation. Other than

in exceptional cases, do not use abrasive

polishescontainingacuttingagentonanew

car. Always wash the car thoroughly before

waxing or polishing.

Stir both primer and touch-up paint thor-

oughly before use and allow each coat to

dry before applying the next.

Touching up the paint

Two-coat enamel

Damaged paintwork should be treated as

soon as it is discovered: the longer it is left,

the greater the risk of corrosion. The anti-

corrosionwarrantydoesnotcovercorrosion

resulting from untreated defects.

As the name implies, two-coat enamel is

applied in two operations. The first coat, the

base color, contains the pigment, metal

flakesandbinder. Thesecondcoatconsists

of a clear enamel, which provides the final

gloss for the paintwork and protects the

base from moisture and environmental con-

taminants.

Surface treatment composition

1 Body panel

2 Zinc (certain components only) 7.5 µm

3 Phosphate coating 3 –5 µm

4 Cathodic ED 23 µm

5 Intermediate coat 35 µm

6 Metallic base/solid base 11 µm

7 Clear enamel 45 µm

Paintwork damage sustained in a crash is

usually extensive and can only be properly

restored by professionals.

Touch-up stone-chip damage as follows:

However, you can repair small scratches

and stone chip damage yourself. The nec-

essary tools and materials, such as primer,

touch-up paint and brushes, are available

from a workshop. We recommend that you

contact a Saab dealer.

In the case of minor flaws in the paintwork,

where the metal has not been exposed and

an undamaged layer of paint remains,

touch-up paint can usually be applied

directly, after any dirt has been scraped

away using a pointed knife.

1 Thoroughly clean the damaged area.

2 Then apply the primer, base color and

finally, the clear enamel. To achieve the

best finish, apply two or three coats of

primer.

If corrosion has already set in, such as the

result of stone-chip damage, use a pointed

knife to scrape off all surface rust. If possi-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

280

Car care

Use a hose to clean the underside of the car

thoroughly. After it has dried, use a brush or

spray to apply a viscous anti-corrosion

agent to any worn or damaged areas, to

prevent the onset of corrosion.

Even after the anti-corrosion warranty has

expired, it makes good sense to continue to

maintain the rustproofing.

Seams in the body, especially those in the

doors and trunk lid, are particularly vulnera-

ble to corrosion from the outside, caused by

grit and salt thrown up from the road, and to

corrosion from the inside, largely as a result

ofcondensation. Keeptheseams cleanand

at the first sign of any rust, apply a thin, pen-

etrating, anti-corrosion oil. Your Saab

dealer will be pleased to give you further

advice.

What causes rust?

Anti-corrosion

treatment

The entire car undergoes a series of anti-

corrosion processes during production.

These include electrophoretic priming,

PVC-based coatingtoprotect againststone

chip damage and corrosion, and treatment

of body cavities and members with thin,

penetrating rustproofing oil.

Steel body panels of automobiles are sub-

ject to rusting whenever air and moisture

manage to penetrate the protective finish.

Body panels may rust throughif theprocess

is unchecked. Rusting can occur wherever

water is trapped or where the car’s panels

are continuously damp.

Damage to paint and undercoating by

stones, gravel and minor crashes immedi-

ately exposes metal to air and moisture.

Road salts used for de-icing will collect on

the bottom of the car and promote rusting.

Areasofthecountrywithhighhumidityhave

a greater potential for rust problems, espe-

cially where salt is used on roads or there is

moist sea air. Industrial pollution (fallout)

may also damage paint and promote rust-

ing.

In addition, most body panels, such as the

hood, doors and floor pan are galvanized.

The anti-corrosion treatment on some parts

of the car is constantly exposed to wear and

prone to damage. This applies particularly

to the underside of the car and inside the

wheel arches, where grit, road salt and the

like that are thrown up can give rise to cor-

rosion where the underseal has worn away.

The extent of this obviously depends on the

conditions in which the car is used.

Accordingly, make it a habit to hose the

underside of the car often and to inspect the

condition of the underseal. The anti-corro-

sionwarrantydoesnotrelievethecarowner

oftheneedtocarryoutnormalmaintenance

to the rustproofing and to make good any

damage.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 281

2 Clean the underside of the car during

the winter. Use high pressure water to

clean the car’s underside (floor panels,

wheelwells)atleastatmid-winterandin

the spring.

3 Inspect the car frequentlyfor leaks or

damage, and arrange for needed

repairspromptly.Afterwashingorafter

heavy rain, check for leaks. When wash-

ing the car inspect body surfaces for

paint damage. While checking for leaks,

lift the floor mats and check underneath

them. Water can collect in these areas

and remain for prolonged periods. Dry

any wet areas including the floor mats.

Have leaks repaired as soon as possi-

ble.

Use touch-up paint to repair small

scratchesorminorfinishdamage.Areas

where metal is exposed will rust quickly

and MUST be repaired immediately by

touch-up or professional repainting.

Rust must be removed, the bare metal

primed and painted. Major body

damageshouldberepairedimmediately

and new panels or exposed areas

should be undercoated with anti- corro-

sion material.

Inspect the undercoating and touch up if

necessary. Pay particular attention to the

fenders and wheel housings, which are

exposed to abrasion by flying gravel, etc. If

the composition has worn or flaked off, the

steel must be thoroughly cleaned and dried

before a fresh coat is applied. The cleaning

is best done with a scraper and a steel wire

brush, followed by washing with solvent.

Apply the new coating thinly, otherwise it

may run off or fall off when dry.

Preventive maintenance

The following procedures are necessary to

help protect against rusting. Refer also to

the terms and conditions of the Performa-

tion Limited Warranty described in the war-

ranty booklet.

1 Wash the car frequently, and wax at

least twice a year. Under adverse

conditions, where there is a rapid

buildup of dirt, sand or road salt, wash

your car at least once a week. After

extreme exposure to salted snow or

slush, evidenced by a white film on the

car, wash the car immediately. Frequent

washing will prevent paint damage from

acid rain and other airborne contami-

nants such as tree sap and bird drop-

pings. If any of these contaminants are

noticed on the car the finish should be

washed immediately.

• Begin washing by rinsing the entire car

with water to loosen and flushoff heavy

concentrations of dirt (include the

underbody).

• Sponge the car with a solution of either

a good quality car soap or mild general

purpose (dish washing) detergent and

water.

Repairs of this type are the owner’s

responsibility andarenotcoveredunder

warranty.

• Rinse car thoroughly with clean water.

• After washing, check and clear all

drains in doors and body panels.

• Wipe the car dry, preferably using a

chamois.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

282

Car care

Troubleshooting

Recovery and/or

recycling of automotive

materials

Air conditioning (A/C)

If a fault occurs in the A/C system, there are

a number of checks you can perform your-

self. If the fault persists, however, have the

system checked at a workshop. We recom-

mend that you contact a Saab dealer.

WARNING

A typical car consists of metals (65–75 %),

plastics (10–15 %), rubber (5 %) and small

quantities of glass, wood, paper and tex-

tiles. The recycling of metals has been com-

monplace for a long time now.

• All repairs and adjustments to the A/C

system must be carried out at a Saab

dealer authorized for this kind of work.

Note:

When the A/C system is running, the intake

air is dehumidified. The resultant condensa-

tion that forms on the evaporator is drained

off under the car. When the car is parked,

this may result in a small puddle forming on

the ground. The warmer the air and the

higher the relative humidity, the more con-

densation will be produced.

• TheA/Csystemispressurized. Donot

break any connections or undo A/C

system components.

To facilitate the sorting of other materials,

plastic parts, for instance, have been

marked to identify the precise nature of the

plastic.

• Escaping gas can cause eye injury or

other personal injury.

NOTICE

Inadequate cooling

• The A/C system is designed for use

with R134a refrigerant.

a Check that the controls for temperature

and air distribution are correctly set; see

“Manual climate-control system 3” on

page 110.

b Check that the condenser (in front of the

radiator) has not become clogged with

dirt and insects.

• Refrigerant handling requires special

equipment and special procedures for

charging and draining the system.

• Never mix R 134a with other refriger-

ants.

c Make sure that the compressor drive

belt does not slip (see page 229).

d Check the fuses for the ventilation fans

and compressor (see page 249).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 283

Otherthaninextremelycoldweather,donot

screen the radiator, e.g. with netting, as this

will greatly diminish its cooling capacity.

Maintenance

NOTICE

Headlight aiming

WARNING

• Applicable to the manual climate control

system - Duringcoldmonthstheair condi-

tioning should be switched on once or

twice a month and run for 5–10 minutes

during highway driving once the engine is

warm.

This action saves the gaskets in the

compressor from being spoiled. The

compressor uses a lubricant that circu-

lates with the coolant.

Do not use a pressure washer when

cleaning the condenser or radiator due to

the risk of damage.

Before checking/adjusting the headlight

aiming, switch off the engine to avoid

dangeroffingersandhandsbeinginjured

by moving parts.

• The compressor drive belt should be

inspected under the regular service

program.

The radiator fan can start up even when

the engine is switched off.

• Clean away dirt and insects from the

condenser and radiator to prevent clog-

ging. Whenwashing the car, usethehose

to spray the radiator and condenser

(located in front of the radiator) from both

sides (both from the front of the car and

from inside the engine bay). Do not use a

pressure washer.

The vehicle has a visual optical headlight

aiming system equipped with vertical

aiming device. The aim has been preset at

the factory and should normally not need

further adjustments.

If your headlights are damaged in a crash,

the headlight aim may be affected. If you

believe your headlights need to be re-

aimed, we recommend that you take it to

your Saab dealer for service. However, it is

possibleforyoutore-aimyourheadlightsas

described in the following procedure.

Note:

The A/C system cannot be switched on

whentheoutsidetemperatureisbelow32°F

(0°C). Turn on the A/C system when the car

is standing in a warm place. Simplest is to

always have the A/C button pressed in. The

A/C system will then cut in automatically

when the outside temperature is high

enough.

Caution: Do not hose down the radia-

tor and condenser while the engine is

hot.

NOTICE

To make sure that your headlights are

aimed properly read all instructions

before beginning. Failure to follow these

instructions could cause damage to

headlight parts or a not correctly aimed

headlight.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

284

Car care

Vertical aiming device

1 Wall or garage door.

2 25 ft (7.6 m) between wall and headlight lens.

3 Measurement from the ground to the low beam aiming marker on the headlight lens.

4 Same measurement as (3) but substract 2 inches.

To check the aim, the vehicle should be

properly prepared as follows:

• The vehicle should be unloaded and fuel

tank full, and one person or 160 lbs.

(75 kg) on the drivers seat.

• The vehicle should be fully assembled

andallotherworkstoppedwhileheadlight

aiming is being done.

• Thevehicleshouldnothaveanysnow, ice

or mud attached to it.

1 Aiming marker on headlight lens

• The vehicle shall be placed so that the

headlights are 25 ft (7.6 m) from a light

colored wall or other flat surface. The

aiming area should be darkened, this will

improveyourabilitytoseethebeamofthe

low beam headlight being aimed.

An optical headlamp aimer can also be

used and will than replace the wall.

• Tires should be inflated to the prescribed

pressure.

• The vehicle must have all four wheels on

a perfectly level surface which is level all

the way to the wall or other flat surface.

• Close all doors.

• Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspen-

sion.

• The vehicle should be placed so it is per-

pendicular to the wall or other flat surface.

Headlight aiming is done with the vehicle

low beam lamps. The high beam lamps will

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Car care 285

be correctly aimed if the low beam lamps

are aimed properly.

If you find that the headlight needs adjust-

ment follow these steps:

1 Open the hood and locate the vertical

aiming devices there are two vertical

aiming devices which shall be turned

simultaneously and the same amount of

turns.

2 Locate the marker on the lens.

3 Measurethedistancefromthegroundto

the aim marker No.1 on each lens.

Subtract 2 inches.

4 At the wall or other flat surface, measure

from the ground to the recorded

Horizontal line on wall or other flat surface

Correctly adjusted low beam

distance (see point 4) and draw a hori-

zontal line the width of the vehicle.

5 Cars with xenon lights:

Thenfollowtheinstructionsintheoptical

headlight aimer instruction manual and

point 1, 2, 5, and 6 in this instruction.

NOTICE

Xenon lights with automatic headlight

levelling system must first do a refer-

encerunbeforeaiming:Starttheengine

and let the headlights do a reference

run. Turn off theengine but leavethelow

beam on.

Do not cover a headlight directly on the

lens to improve beam cut-off when

aiming. Covering a headlight may cause

excessive heat build-up that may cause

damage to the headlight.

Cars with halogen lights:

Turn on the low beam headlights.

Both variants:

6 Turn the two vertical aiming screws

simultaneously in the same direction

indicated on the headlight until the hori-

zontal cut-off of the headlight is aligned

with the horizontal line on the wall.

7 If an optical headlight aimer device is

used follow point 1 and 2 and center the

lens of the optical headlight aimer

device at the intersection of the two

markers on the headlight lens.

Place apiece of cardboard or equivalent

(althoughnotdirectlyonthelens)infront

of the headlight not being aimed. This

should allow the beam cut-off of the

headlight being aimed to be seen on the

flat surface.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

286

Car care

(This page has been left blank.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Customer Assistance and Information 287

Customer Assistance and Information

Maintenance schedule __ 288

Owner assistance ______ 290

Reporting Safety Defects

(USA) _______________ 291

Reporting Safety Defects

to the Canadian

government__________ 291

Vehicle Data Collection

and Event Data

Recorders ___________ 292

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,

market specification, options or accessories).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

288

Customer Assistance and Information

TIMEFORMAINSERVICE willbesetwhen

additional maintenance is necessary, such

asairfilterorsparkplugreplacement. When

the message Time for service. is displayed,

contact your Saab Dealer for a service

appointment.

Failure to perform scheduled maintenance

in a timely manner may result in serious

damage to key components or systems.

SERVICE INTERVALS

Maintenance schedule

Atimeforservicemessagewillilluminateon

theSaabInstrumentDisplay(SID)whenthe

car is due for regular maintenance. There

are three different messages that will

appear:

The Maintenance Schedule prescribes a

service program to the purchaser/operator

of a Saab that is reasonable and necessary

to ensure the proper emission control sys-

tems function, safety and reliability of the

Saab automobile in normal use. Additional

maintenance is recommended for specific

componentswhenthecarisoperatedunder

certain severe conditions. Proper mainte-

nance is always a good practice!

TIME FOR INTERMEDIATE SERVICE

indicates that an oil/filter change is required

along with several inspections. This mes-

sage is set by the engine management

system which calculates service intervals

based on several factors including driving

habits, ambient temperature, number of

coldstarts,mileagedrivenandelapsedtime

since the last service. If mileage accumula-

tiondoesnotoccur, themessagewillbeset,

and maintenance required at a maximum of

2 years.

Authorized Saab dealers are equipped and

trained to meet your Saab’s service needs.

They regularly receive up-to-date Saab ser-

vice manuals and parts and technical ser-

vice bulletins from Saab and are able,

throughtheirfranchiseagreement,toattend

Saab service schools, obtain Saab special

tools and technical assistance and pur-

chase original equipment service and

replacement parts.

Today’s complex automobiles should only

be entrusted to the most knowledgeable

serviceprofessionals. ASaabdealerisyour

best choice.

TIME FOR MAIN AND INTERMEDIATE

SERVICE

indicates that an oil/filter change is required

along with several inspections and addi-

tionalmaintenancesuchas airfilter orspark

plug replacement.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Customer Assistance and Information 289

Engine oil and filter changes

Service record retention

Service costs

Changingtheengineoilandfilterisrequired

at every service point. Use only a Saab

approved long-life oil filter and engine oils

meeting the SAE viscosity ratings and API

service classifications stated in the “Techni-

cal data” section of this Owner’s Manual.

The use of extra additives in the oil is not

necessary and is not recommended, and

may be harmful to turbochargers.

It is the owner’s responsibility to retain ser-

vice records. If possible, you should keep

copies of all shop work orders for all service

and repairs, whenever performed. As indi-

cated in the new car and emission control

system warranties, it is important to docu-

ment that all necessary maintenance has

been done.

Dealer pricing practices and labor for ser-

vice work vary. Saab’s recommended ser-

vice times for each service point do not

include the labor required to replace wear

items, such as wiper blades, brake pads or

tires. Nor is labor to perform other service or

repairs found to be necessary as a result of

the inspections included in these times.

Additional labor and parts will be charged

for such work when necessary, except as

coveredunder an applicable Saabwarranty

or any optional extended service contract.

Transmission fluid changes or suspension

alignment, when necessary, are also addi-

tional.

Dealer charges for general shop material,

regulated hazardous waste removal, recy-

clingexpensesorotheroperationcostsmay

also be applied to service and repair

invoices and are apt to vary by dealer and

location.

HOW THE SERVICE RECORD IS ORGA-

NIZED

More frequent oil changes are recom-

mended if your vehicle is operated under

any of the following conditions:

The service record is comprised of a series

of coupons on which to record services as

they are performed. There are additional

coupons for documenting extra engine oil

and filter changes, extra automatic trans-

mission fluid services necessary for severe

service conditions, and brake fluid changes.

• Most trips are less than 5–10 miles (8–

16 km). This is particularly important

when outside temperatures are below

freezing.

• Most trips include extensive idling

(frequent stop-and-go traffic).

HOW TO USE THE SERVICE RECORD

COUPONS

• Most trips are through dusty areas (such

as construction zones).

When thecar is brought toa Saab dealer for

scheduled maintenance, present the War-

ranties & Service Record Booklet to the ser-

vice manager. When the technician has

completed the service, the technician will

sign the maintenance record. The person

responsible for quality assurance at the

dealership will also sign and stamp the

record with the dealer identification stamp.

• If the vehicle is used for delivery service,

police, taxi or other commercial applica-

tions.

If your driving habits match this description,

have the engine oil and filter changed in-

between normal services. Theseconditions

cause the engine oil to break down faster.

The Warranties and Service Record Book-

let has provisions to record extra oil

changes.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

290

Customer Assistance and Information

Change of Address Notification

(U.S. and Canada)

Owner assistance

Two change of address cards are provided

at the end of the Warranties and Service

Record Booklet. Knowing your current

address allows Saab to contact you in the

event of a recall or service campaign.

Please help us keep our records up to date

for your own peace of mind.

Warranties and service problem

assistance

For complete information about all applica-

ble warranties, including the New Car War-

ranty, Perforation Warranty, Vehicle Emis-

sion Warranty and Emission Perforation

Warranty, consult the Warranties and Ser-

vice Record Booklet which accompanies

this Owner’s Manual. It also contains owner

assistance information including Saab

RoadsideAssistance. Ifthebookletislostor

misplaced, a new one may be ordered

through a Saab dealer or by contacting

Saab.

Service information

Factory Service Manuals for the Saab 9-3

and 9-5 car lines can be ordered through

your dealer. These are comprehensive

manuals on CD rom, geared to use by pro-

fessional technicians. Consult your Saab

dealer for prices for your model.

In the U.S. there is a national Customer

Assistance Center at Saab Cars USA, Inc.

Thetoll-freenumbertocallfromall50states

is 1-800-955-9007.

In Canada, please call the Saab Customer

Assistance Centre at 1-800-263-1999.

A list of authorized Saab sales and service

dealers is available for those planning to

travel in the United States and Canada.

Canadian or U.S. travelers may call the

Customer Assistance Center in the country

in which they are traveling.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Customer Assistance and Information 291

Reporting Safety

Defects (USA)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause

injury or death, you should immediately

inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-

fying Saab Cars USA, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

mayopenaninvestigation, andifitfindsthat

a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,

it may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between you, your

dealer, or Saab Cars USA, Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the

Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-

9393 (or 202/366-0123 in Washington D.C.

area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department

ofTransportation,Washington,D.C.20590.

You can also obtain other information about

motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

Reporting Safety

Defects to the Canadian

government

If you live in Canada, and believe that your

vehicle has a safety defect, you should

immediately notify Transport Canada, in

addition to notifying General Motors of

Canada Limited.

You may write to Transport Canada at Box

8880, Ottawa, Ontario, K1G 3J2.

In addition to notifying Transport Canada in

a situation like this, we certainly hope you

will notify us. In Canada, please call our

Saab Customer Assistance Centre at 1-

800-263-1999.

Or write:

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Assistance Centre,

1908 Colonel Sam Drive,

Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

292

Customer Assistance and Information

To read this information, special equipment

is needed and access to the vehicle or the

SDM is required.

Saab will not access information about a

crasheventor share it with others other than

Vehicle Data Collection and

Event Data Recorders

Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehi-

cles, has a number of sophisticated com-

puter systems that monitor and control sev-

eral aspects of the vehicle’s performance.

Your vehicleuses on-board vehicle comput-

erstomonitoremissioncontrolcomponents

to optimize fuel economy, to monitor condi-

tions for air bag deployment and, if so

equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and

to help the driver control the vehicle in diffi-

cult driving situations. Some information

may be stored during regular operations to

facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;

other information is stored only in a crash

event by computer systems commonly

called event data recorders (EDR).

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if

the vehicle is leased, with the consent of

the lessee,

• in response to an official request of police

or similar government office,

• as part of Saab’s defense of litigation

through the discovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once Saab collects or receives

data, Saab may

• use the data for Saab research needs,

• make it available for research where

appropriate confidentiality is to be main-

tained and need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to a

specific vehicle with non-Saab organiza-

tions for research purposes.

Others, suchaslawenforcement, mayhave

access to the special equipment that can

read the information if they have access to

the vehicle or SDM.

If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®,

please check the OnStar® subscription ser-

vice agreement or manual for information

on its operations and data collection.

In a crash event, computer systems, such

as the Air Bag Sensing and Diagnostic

Module (SDM) in your vehicle may record

information about the condition of the vehi-

cle and how it was operated, such as data

related to engine speed, brake application,

throttle position, vehicle speed, steering

wheelangle, lateralacceleration,safetybelt

usage, air bag readiness, air bag perfor-

mance, and the severity of a collision. This

information has been used to improve vehi-

cle crash performance and may be used to

improve crash performance of future vehi-

cles and driving safety. Unlike the data

recorders on many airplanes, these on-

board systems do not record sounds, such

as conversation of vehicle occupants.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical data 293

Technical data

General data __________ 294

Engine _______________ 297

Engine oil_____________ 298

Fuel__________________ 299

Engines ______________ 300

Electrical system_______ 300

Drive belt _____________ 301

Manual transmission ___ 301

Automatic transmission_ 302

Suspension ___________ 302

Steering ______________ 302

Brake system__________ 303

Wheels and tires _______ 304

Plates and labels_______ 307

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,

market specification, options or accessories).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

294

Technical data

General data

Overall length, including bumpers: ___

Sport Sedan and Convertible _________ 182.5'' (4635 mm)

SportCombi_______________________ 183.2'' (4654 mm)

Overall width, including door mirrors __

Maximum height _________________

Wheelbase _____________________

Track:

80.2'' (2038 mm)

60.6'' (1539 mm)

105.3'' (2675 mm)

V.I.N. label on vehi-

cles sold in U.S.A.

V.I.N. label on vehicles sold in Canada

Permissible load (in addition to the driver) = GVW minus curb weight. The maximum

permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.

The precise curb weight of the vehicle and load capacity are specified in the vehicle

registration documents.

Front ____________________________ 59.8'' (1524 mm)

Rear ____________________________ 59.3'' (1506 mm)

Trunk length, Sport Sedan:

Ground clearance at GVW _________

Number of seats (incl. driver):

approx. 120 mm

Rear seat raised___________________ 40.8'' (1036 mm)

Rear seat lowered _________________ 69.8'' (1774 mm)

Sport Sedan and SportCombi ________

Convertible _______________________

Turning circle:

Trunk length, Convertible __________

Trunk length, SportCombi:

29.1" (740 mm)

Rear seat raised___________________ 39.9'' (1013 mm)

Rear seat lowered _________________ 70.0'' (1777 mm)

Trunk volume (VDA):

Measured at vehicle extremities _______ 37.4 ft. (11.4 m)

cars with V6 engine ________________ 40.0 ft. (12.2 m)

Sport Sedan ______________________ 15.0 cu.ft. (425 l)

Convertible, soft top raised___________ 12.4 cu.ft. (352 l)

Convertible, soft top folded___________ 8.3 cu.ft. (235 l)

SportCombi ______________________ 14.8 cu.ft. (419 l)

SportCombi with rear seat lowered ____ 45.0 cu.ft. (1273 l)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technical data 295

Curb weight

(i.e. with full fuel tank, full washer fluid res-

ervoir, standard tools and spare wheel):

Maximum roof load, Sport Sedan and Sport-

Combi________________________

220 lbs. (100 kg)

175 lbs. (80 kg)

Maximum load in trunk, Sport Sedan, Con-

vertible and SportCombi__________

Sport Sedan ______________________ 3200–3420 lbs.

(1450–1550 kg)

The combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed:

Convertible _______________________ 3570–3700 lbs.

(1620–1680 kg)

Sport Sedan and SportCombi ________ 925 lbs. (420 kg)

Convertible _______________________ 775 lbs. (352 kg)

SportCombi_______________________ xx

Gross vehicle weight (GVW):

Maximum combined weight of driver and

passengers ___________________

Sport Sedan ______________________ 4120–4340 lbs.

(1870–1970 kg)

Sport Sedan and SportCombi

Convertible _______________________ 4460–4520 lbs.

(2025–2050 kg)

(5x150 lbs.)_______________________ 750 lbs. (340 kg)

Convertible (4x150 lbs.) _____________ 600 lbs. (272 kg)

SportCombi_______________________ xx

Maximum axle load:

Sport Sedan, front _________________ 2480 lbs. (1125 kg)

Sport Sedan, rear __________________ 2230 lbs. (1010 kg)

Convertible, front __________________ 2540 lbs. (1150 kg)

Convertible, rear ___________________ 2310 lbs. (1050 kg)

SportCombi_______________________ xx

Weight distribution:

Curb weight + driver (150 lbs. (68 kg)),

front/rear, Sport Sedan and SportCombi approx. 60/40 %

GVW, front/rear, Sport Sedan and Sport-

Combi ___________________________ approx. 50/50 %

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

296

Technical data

Trailer:

WARNING

Trailer with brakes________________

Max. 3500 lbs.

(1588 kg)

• The GVW and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded.

Note that if some accessories (e.g. towbar, CD changer) are

fitted, the available load capacity is reduced by the weight of

these.

Trailer without brakes _____________

Recommended towball load ________

Max. 1000 lbs.

(450 kg)

110–165 lbs.

(50–75 kg)